Integra | DHC-80.1 | Owner Manual | Integra DHC-80.1 Preamplifier Owner Manual

Integra DHC-80.1 Preamplifier Owner Manual
AV Controller
DHC-80.1
Instruction Manual
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED
SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
WARNING
AVIS
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
Important Safety Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
PORTABLE CART WARNING
12. Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is
used, use caution when
S3125A
moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
2
15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
into the apparatus,
C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
water,
D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust
only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of
other controls may result in damage and will
often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the apparatus to its normal
operation,
E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
any way, and
F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
performance this indicates a need for service.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a
fire or electric shock.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
this unit.
17. Batteries
Always consider the environmental issues and follow local regulations when disposing of batteries.
18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides
and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf
or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")
away from the rear panel or wall, creating a fluelike gap for warm air to escape.
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not userserviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pressing the [On/Standby] button to select Standby
mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If you do not
intend to use the unit for an extended period,
remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
Preventing Hearing Loss
Caution
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss.
Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or
the like.
Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you originally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer from whom you purchased this unit
or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
Modèle pour les Canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
3
Thank you for purchasing an Integra AV controller.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable you
to obtain optimum performance and listening enjoyment
from your new AV controller.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:
Remote controller & two batteries (AA/R6)
Speaker setup microphone
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Power cord
(Plug type varies from country to country.)
*
4
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operations are the
same regardless of color.
Contents
Introduction
Important Safety Instructions ............................................ 2
Precautions....................................................................... 3
Supplied Accessories ....................................................... 4
Features............................................................................ 6
Front & Rear Panels ......................................................... 8
Front Panel ................................................................... 8
Display .......................................................................... 9
Rear Panel .................................................................. 10
Remote Controller........................................................... 13
Installing the Batteries................................................. 13
Aiming the Remote Controller..................................... 13
Controlling the AV Controller ...................................... 14
About Home Theater ...................................................... 16
Enjoying Home Theater .............................................. 16
Connection
Connecting the AV controller .......................................... 17
Connecting Your Speakers ......................................... 17
Connecting a Power Amplifier with RCA Inputs.......... 18
Connecting a Power Amplifier with XLR Inputs .......... 19
Bi-amping the Front Speakers .................................... 20
Connecting Antenna ................................................... 21
About AV Connections................................................ 23
Connecting Components with HDMI........................... 24
Connecting Both Audio & Video.................................. 26
Which Connections Should I Use? ............................. 26
Connecting a TV or Projector...................................... 29
Connecting a DVD Player ........................................... 30
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Playback..... 32
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Recording ... 33
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial Set-top box,
or Other Video Source.............................................. 34
Connecting a Game Console...................................... 35
Connecting a Camcorder or Other Device.................. 36
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable ......................... 37
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder .... 38
Connecting a Balanced Audio Source ........................ 38
Connecting an RI Dock ............................................... 39
Connecting a Universal Port Option Series ................ 39
Connecting Integra/Onkyo u Components............... 40
Connecting the Power Cord........................................ 40
Turning On & First Time Setup
Turning On the AV controller .......................................... 41
Turning On and Standby............................................. 41
First Time Setup ............................................................. 42
Monitor Setup.............................................................. 42
Selecting the Language used for the onscreen
setup menus............................................................. 43
Using the Onscreen Setup Menus .............................. 44
Using the Display to change the settings.................... 44
Monitor Out Setup....................................................... 45
Video Input Setup ....................................................... 47
Digital Audio Input Setup ............................................ 49
Analog Audio Input Setup ........................................... 50
Speaker Settings......................................................... 51
TV Format Setup (Australian models)......................... 52
FM/AM Frequency Step Setup.................................... 52
Changing the Input Display......................................... 53
Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup.......................................................... 54
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................ 60
Selecting the Input Source.......................................... 60
Adjusting the Bass & Treble........................................ 61
Displaying Source Information .................................... 61
Setting the Display Brightness .................................... 62
Muting the AV Controller............................................. 62
Using the Sleep Timer ................................................ 62
Using Headphones ..................................................... 62
Using Easy Macros ..................................................... 63
Listening to the Radio ..................................................... 65
Using the Tuner .......................................................... 65
Presetting AM/FM Stations ......................................... 66
Listening to Satellite Radio (North American models).... 67
Using RDS (Australian models) .................................. 78
Universal Port Option UP-A1 Dock for iPod ................... 80
About the UP-A1 Dock ............................................... 80
Compatible iPod models............................................. 80
Function Overview ...................................................... 80
Controlling iPod .......................................................... 81
Recording ....................................................................... 83
Using the Listening Modes
Using the Listening Modes ............................................. 84
Selecting Listening Modes.......................................... 84
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format... 85
About the Listening Modes ......................................... 92
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup ............................................................. 95
Onscreen Setup Menus .............................................. 95
Input/Output Assign .................................................... 96
Speaker Setup ............................................................ 98
Audio Adjust ............................................................. 102
Source Setup............................................................ 106
Assigning Listening Modes to Input Sources............ 111
Miscellaneous (Volume/OSD) Setup ........................ 112
Hardware Setup........................................................ 113
Lock Setup................................................................ 118
Digital Input Signal Formats ..................................... 118
Using the Audio Settings .......................................... 119
NET/USB
NET/USB ...................................................................... 122
About NET ................................................................ 122
Connecting the AV Controller ................................... 122
Listening to Internet Radio........................................ 123
Playing Music Files on a Server ............................... 124
Network Settings ...................................................... 128
About USB ................................................................ 129
Playing Music Files on a USB Device ...................... 130
Multi Zone
Multi Zone..................................................................... 132
Multiroom Capability ................................................. 132
Connecting Zone 2 ................................................... 133
Connecting Zone 3 ................................................... 134
Setting the Multi Zone............................................... 135
Using Zone 2/3 ......................................................... 136
Using the 12V Triggers............................................. 138
Using the Remote Controller in Zone 2/3 and
Multiroom Control Kits............................................ 139
Controlling Other Components
Controlling Other Components ..................................... 140
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes .................. 140
Looking up for Remote Control Code ....................... 140
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 142
Remote Control Codes for Integra/Onkyo
Components Connected via u ............................ 143
Resetting Remote Mode Buttons.............................. 143
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 143
Controlling a TV ........................................................ 144
Controlling a DVD Player or DVD Recorder ............. 145
Controlling a VCR or PVR ........................................ 146
Controlling a Satellite Receiver or Cable Receiver... 147
Controlling a CD Player, CD Recorder or MD Recorder ... 148
Controlling an RI Dock.............................................. 149
Controlling a Cassette Recorder .............................. 150
Activities Setup ......................................................... 151
Learning Commands ................................................ 153
Using Normal Macros ............................................... 154
Others
Troubleshooting............................................................ 155
Specifications ............................................................... 161
Video Resolution Chart................................................. 162
* To reset the AV controller to its factory defaults, turn
it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR] button,
press the [On/Standby] button (see page 155).
5
Features
Processing
Miscellaneous
*1
• THX Ultra2 Plus Certified
• HQV-Reon-VX Video Processing with 1080p Video
Upscaling of All Video Sources via HDMI
• HDMI ver.1.3a with (Deep Color, x.v.Color, Lip Sync,
DTS*2-HD Master Audio, Dolby TrueHD*3, DSD and
Multi-CH PCM)
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz*3 – New Surround Format (fronthigh)
• Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™*8 for New
Surround Channels (front-wide/front-high)
• 4 DSP Modes for Gaming; Rock/Sports/Action/RPG
• Non-Scaling Configuration
• Direct Mode
• Music Optimizer*4 for Digital Music Files
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory
• Latest Burr-Brown 192 kHz/32-Bit DACs Improve
Jitter Performance for Cleaner Sound
• Three TI (Aureus) 32-bit Processing DSP
• Neural Surround Decoding*9
• DSD Direct
• 40 SIRIUS*7/AM/FM Presets (North American models)
• 40 AM/FM Presets (Australian models)
• Dolby Volume*3
• Audyssey MultEQ® XT*8 to Correct Room Acoustic
Problems
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ™*8 for Loudness Correction
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume™*8
• Crossover Adjustment
(40/45/50/55/60/70/80/90/100/110/120/130/150/200
Hz)
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 250 ms)
• Bi-Directional Preprogrammed (with onscreen display setup) RI-Compatible Learning Remote with 4
Activities and Mode-Key LEDs
• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration
Connections
*2.
• Balanced XLR stereo input
• Balanced XLR 9.2-channel preouts, with front biamping capability
• 8 HDMI*5 Inputs and 2 Outputs
•
for System Control
• 7 Digital Inputs (4 Optical/3 Coaxial)
• Universal Port for UP-A1 (Dock for the iPod)/HD
Radio™*6 tuner module (North American models)/
DAB+ tuner module (Australian models)
• SIRIUS*7 Satellite Radio Connectivity (North American models)
• Internet Radio* Connectivity (SIRIUS Internet
Radio*7/vTuner/Pandora/Rhapsody)
* Services available may vary depending on the
region.
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files
• USB Port for a USB Mass Storage Device (Audio
Only)
*1.
THX and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround
EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535;
7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol,
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS,
Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
*3.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
*4. Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*5.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
*6.
HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
To receive HD Radio broadcasts, you must install an Onkyo
UP-HT1 HD Radio tuner module (sold separately).
*7.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and
logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights
reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes
and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home
docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to
receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or
otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite
Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.
6
Features—Continued
*8.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT,
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ and Audyssey Dynamic EQ™
are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for
home and other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
*9.
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
THX Ultra2 Plus
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Ultra2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will
give you superb performance for many years to come.
THX Ultra2 Plus requirements define hundreds of
parameters, including power amplifier performance,
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for both
digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 Plus receivers
also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX
Mode) which accurately translate movie soundtracks
for home theater playback.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of
RealNetworks, Inc.
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital
Living Network Alliance.”
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.
7
Front & Rear Panels
Front Panel
a
tuv
b c d ef
g h i j k l m n op q r
wx
y
z
s
A
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
a On/Standby button (41)
This button is used to set the AV controller to On or
Standby.
j Music button (84)
Selects the listening modes intended for use with
music.
b Standby indicator (41)
Lights when the AV controller is in Standby mode,
and it flashes while a signal is being received from
the remote controller.
k Game button (84)
Selects the listening modes intended for use with
video games.
c Zone 2 indicator (136)
Lights when Zone 2 is selected.
d Zone 3 indicator (136)
Lights when Zone 3 is selected.
e Remote control sensor/transmitter (13)
The sensor receives control signals from the remote
controller. The transmitter transmits setting data to
the remote controller.
f Monitor Out button (42)
Used to set the “Monitor Out” setting.
g Tone button (61, 137)
Used to select the tone (bass and treble) for the main
room and the tone and balance for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Down and Up [–]/[+] buttons (61, 137)
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble) for the
main room and the tone and balance for Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
h Display
See “Display” on page 9.
i Movie/TV button (84)
Selects the listening modes intended for use with
movies and TV.
8
l Dimmer button (62)
(North American models)
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.
RT/PTY/TP button (78)
(Australian models)
This button is used for RDS (Radio Data System).
The [RT/PTY/TP] button does not work in areas
where RDS broadcasts are not available. See “Using
RDS (Australian models)” on page 78.
m Memory button (66)
This button is used when storing or deleting radio
presets.
n Tuning Mode button (65)
This button is used to select the Auto or Manual
tuning mode.
o Display button (61)
This button is used to display various information
about the currently selected input source.
p Setup button
This button is used to access the onscreen setup
menus that appear on the connected TV.
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
q Arrow, Tuning, Preset and Enter buttons
When the AM or FM input source is selected, the
Tuning [q]/[w] buttons are used to tune the tuner,
and the Preset [e]/[r] buttons are used to select
radio presets (see pages 66 and 79).
When the onscreen setup menus are used, they work
as arrow buttons and are used to select and set
items. The [Enter] button is also used with the
onscreen setup menus.
r Return button
This button is used to return to the previously displayed onscreen setup menu.
s Master Volume control (60)
This control is used to adjust the volume of the AV
controller to –Q dB, –81.5 dB through +18.0 dB
(relative display).
The volume level can also be displayed as an absolute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 112.
t Zone 2 and Off buttons (136)
The [Zone 2] button is used to select Zone 2.
The [Off] button is used to turn off the output of
Zone 2.
u Zone 3 and Off buttons (136)
The [Zone 3] button is used to select Zone 3.
The [Off] button is used to turn off the output of
Zone 3.
v Phones jack (62)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a standard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.
w Setup Mic jack (55)
Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup microphone connects here.
x Zone Level Down and Up [w]/[q] buttons
(137)
Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
y Input selector buttons (60)
These buttons are used to select from the following
input sources: DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
Game, AUX1, AUX2, TV/Tape, Tuner, CD, Phono,
Port, Net/USB.
z USB port (129)
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files can be
plugged in here and the music selected can be
played through the AV controller.
A AUX1 Input (36)
This input can be used to connect a camcorder,
game console, and so on. There are jacks for composite video, analog audio, and optical digital audio.
AUX1 Input HDMI (25)
Used to connect an HD camcorder etc.
Display
a
f
b
g
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
a Speaker/channel indicators
Indicate the speaker channels used by the current
listening mode.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are outputted for the current listening
mode.
LW:
LH:
RH:
RW:
FL:
C:
FR:
SL:
Front wide left
Front high left
Front high right
Front wide right
Front left
Center
Front right
Surround left
h
SW:
SR:
SBL:
SB:
SBR:
c
d
e
i
j
kl
Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
Surround right
Surround back left
Surround back
Surround back right
b Listening mode and format indicators (84)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.
Audyssey (54, 100):
Flashes during Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup. Lights when the “Equalizer Settings” is set to “Audyssey” or
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™ listening mode is selected.
9
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
Dynamic EQ (104):
Lights when “Dynamic EQ” is enabled.
Vol (104, 120):
Lights when “Dynamic Volume” is enabled.
Vol (103, 120):
Lights when “Dolby Volume” is enabled.
c NETWORK indicator (123)
Lights when the Net input selector is selected.
d Tuning indicators
RDS (Australian models) (78):
Lights when tuned to a radio station that supports
RDS (Radio Data System).
AUTO (65):
Lights when Auto Tuning mode is selected for AM
or FM radio. Goes off when Manual Tuning mode is
selected.
TUNED (65):
Lights when tuned to a radio station.
FM STEREO (65):
Lights when tuned to a stereo FM station.
e SLEEP indicator (62)
Lights when the Sleep function has been set.
f Bi AMP indicator (20)
Lights when the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is
set to “Bi-Amp”.
g Headphone indicator (62)
Lights when a pair of headphones are plugged into
the Phones jack.
h Message area
Displays various information.
i USB indicator (130)
Lights up when a USB mass storage device is
detected.
j Volume level (60)
Displays the volume level.
k MUTING indicator (62)
Flashes while the AV controller is muted.
l Audio input indicators
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
Rear Panel
* North American models
a b cd e f
rs t u v
g h i j
w xy zA B C
a UNIVERSAL PORT
This port is for connecting the component with the
Universal Port option such as UP-A1 Dock.
b IR IN/OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be connected to the IR IN jack, allowing you to control the
AV controller while you’re in Zone 2/3, or control it
when it’s out of sight, for example, installed in a
cabinet.
10
lm n
k
D
op q
E F
G*
A commercially available IR emitter can be connected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.
c DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and 3
These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting
components with optical digital audio outputs, such
as CD and DVD/BD players. They’re assignable,
which means you can assign each one to an input
selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio Input
Setup” on page 49.
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
d DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
These coaxial digital audio inputs are for connecting components with coaxial digital audio outputs,
such as CD and DVD/BD players. They’re assignable, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio
Input Setup” on page 49.
m COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT
This RCA component video output is for connecting a TV or projector with a component video input
located in your main listening room or Zone 2.
e USB port
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files can be
plugged in here and the music selected can be
played through the AV controller.
o PC INPUT ANALOG RGB
This input terminal is for connecting a personal
computer with an analog RGB output. You can
assign it to an input selector to suit your setup. See
“Component Video Input Setup” on page 48.
f ETHERNET
This port is for connecting the AV controller to your
Ethernet network (e.g., router or switch) for playing
music files on a networked computer or media
server, or for listening to Internet radio.
p FM ANTENNA
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.
AM ANTENNA
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna.
g u REMOTE CONTROL
This u (Remote Interactive) jack can be connected to an u jack on another Onkyo AV component. The AV controller’s remote controller can then
be used to control that component. To use u, you
must make an analog audio connection (RCA)
between the AV controller and the other AV component, even if they are connected digitally.
h RS232
Terminal for control.
i HDMI IN 1–7, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) connections carry digital audio and digital video.
The HDMI inputs are for connecting components
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, Bluray Disc Player, DVD recorder, or DVR (digital
video recorder). They’re assignable, which means
you can assign each one to an input selector to suit
your setup. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47.
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or projector with an HDMI input.
j MONITOR OUT
These S-Video and composite video jacks should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
k COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2 and 3
These RCA component video inputs are for connecting components with a component video output, such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR
(digital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 48.
l COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
These RCA component video outputs are for connecting a TV or projector with a component video
input.
n ZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
q AC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.
r GND screw
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.
s PHONO IN
These analog audio inputs are for connecting a turntable.
t BALANCE L/R INPUT
This balanced XLR input is for connecting a component with a stereo balanced XLR output. For a
mono source, connect to the BALANCE L XLR.
u CD IN
These analog audio inputs are for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.
v 12V TRIGGER OUT (A/B/C)
These outputs can be connected to the 12-volt trigger inputs on other components.
w TV/TAPE IN/OUT
These analog audio inputs and outputs are for connecting a TV or recorder with an analog audio input
and output (cassette, Mini Disc, etc.).
x AUX 2 IN
This analog audio input is for connecting an analog
audio output, such as an audio device, etc.
y GAME IN
Here you can connect a game console, etc. Input
jacks include S-Video, composite video, and analog
audio.
z CBL/SAT IN
Here you can connect a cable/satellite receiver, settop box, etc. Input jacks include S-Video, composite
video, and analog audio.
11
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
A VCR/DVR IN/OUT
Here you can connect a VCR or DVR (digital video
recorder). Input and output jacks include S-Video,
composite video, and analog audio.
B DVD/BD IN
Here you can connect a DVD/BD player. Input
jacks include S-Video, composite video, and analog
audio. You can connect a DVD/BD player’s 2-channel analog audio output.
C MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio output, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or Super
Audio CD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
D PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R,
SURR BACK L/R, and FRONT HIGH/WIDE
L/R
These multichannel analog audio outputs can be
connected to the analog audio input on a multichannel power amplifier.
PRE OUT: SW1, SW2
These analog audio outputs can be connected to a
powered subwoofer. You can connect the powered
subwoofer with each jacks respectively. Level and
distance can be set individually for each output.
E PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3. The
SW jacks can be connected to the inputs on powered subwoofers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
F PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER 1/2, SURR L/R, SURR BACK
L/R, and FRONT HIGH/WIDE L/R
These balanced XLR outputs are for connecting a
multichannel power amplifier and powered subwoofer.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can
be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp the front
speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on
page 20.
G SIRIUS antenna (North American models)
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS Satellite Radio
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS
instructions).
See pages 17 to 40 for connection information.
12
Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries
1
To open the battery compartment, press
the small lever and remove the cover.
Aiming the Remote Controller
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV controller’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Transmission
Remote control sensor
AV controller
2
Insert the two supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
30° off center
(Left/Right/Up/Down)
Received
Transmitter
AV controller
Incoming sensor
15
15
3
Replace the cover and push it shut.
Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possible to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.
15° off center
(Left/Right/Up/Down)
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
controller is subjected to bright light, such as direct
sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this
in mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV controller is installed close
to equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote controller may not work reliably.
• Don’t put anything, such as a book, on the remote controller, because the buttons may be pressed inadvertently, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
controller is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an
obstacle between it and the AV controller’s remote
control sensor.
• When the remote control codes have been registered
and you want to operate another component
(page 142), or when you want to operate an Integra/Onkyo component without u connection, point
the remote controller at the other component to use it.
• When you want to operate an Integra/Onkyo component with u connection or an
-compatible
component connected via HDMI (pages 144 and 145),
point the remote controller at the AV controller’s
remote control sensor.
13
Remote Controller—Continued
Controlling the AV Controller
To control the AV controller, press the [Receiver] button to select Receiver mode.
You can also use the remote controller to control your
DVD/BD player, CD player, and other components.
See pages 140 to 154 for more details.
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
a Standby button (41)
Sets the AV controller to Standby.
b On button (41)
Turns on the AV controller.
c Activities buttons (63, 154)
Used with the MACRO function.
a
b
c
i3
d Remote Mode/Input Selector buttons
(60, 144 to 150)
Selects the remote controller modes and the input
sources.
e Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons
Used to select and adjust settings.
d
f Setup button
Used to change settings.
*1
j
g Listening Mode buttons (84)
Used to select the listening modes.
k
h Dimmer button (62)
Adjusts the display brightness.
l
i Display button (61)
Displays information about the current input source.
4
*2
1e
f
m
n
j Muting button (62)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
k VOL [q]/[w] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller regardless
of the currently selected remote controller mode.
l Video button (42, 46, 107)
Used to change video settings.
m Return button
Returns to the previous display when changing settings.
g
5
2h
o
*1 When you want to change the remote controller mode without
changing the current input source, press the [Mode] button and
within about eight seconds, press the Remote Mode button.
Then, with the AV controller’s remote controller, you can control the component corresponding to the button you pressed.
*2 SP Layout button is not used for this model.
14
n Audio button (119)
Used to change audio settings.
When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”
(page 115), this button is disabled.
o Sleep button (62)
Used with the Sleep function.
Remote Controller—Continued
■ Controlling the tuner
To control the AV controller’s tuner, press the [Tuner] (or
[Receiver]) button.
You can select AM or FM by pressing the [Tuner] button
repeatedly.
1
Arrow [q]/[w] buttons
Used to tune into radio stations.
2
D.TUN button (65)
(Tuner remote mode only)
Selects the Direct tuning mode.
3
Display button
Displays information about the band, frequency,
preset number, and so on.
4
CH +/– button (66)
Used to select radio presets.
5
Number buttons (65, 66)
Used to select radio stations directly in the Direct
tuning mode. Also you can select a preset directly.
Note:
An Onkyo cassette recorder connected via u can also
be controlled in Receiver mode (see page 150).
15
About Home Theater
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV controller’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. With DVDs you can enjoy DTS and Dolby Digital. With
analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Front left and right speakers
These output the overall sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide
a solid anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the
listener at about ear level, and equidistant from the TV. Angle them inward
so as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.
Front high left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height,
and Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™.
They significantly enhance the spatial experience.
Position them at least 3.3 feet (100 cm) above the front left and
right speakers (preferably as high as possible) and at an angle
slightly wider than the front left and right speakers.
Front wide left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
(DSX). They significantly enhance the spatial
experience. Position them well outside of the
front left and right speakers. See also
http://www.audyssey.com/technology/dsx.html
about optimum speaker placement for
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™.
Center speaker
This speaker enhances the
front left and right speakers,
making sound movements distinct and providing a full sound
image. In movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to your TV facing forward at about ear level, or
at the same height as the front
left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds
of the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects)
channel. The volume and quality of the
bass output from your subwoofer will
depend on its position, the shape of your
listening room, and your listening position. In general, a good bass sound can
be obtained by installing the subwoofer
in a front corner, or at one-third the width
of the wall, as shown.
Tip: To find the best position for your
subwoofer, while playing a movie or
some music with good bass, experiment
by placing your subwoofer at various
positions within the room, and choose
the one that provides the most satisfying
results.
1/3 of wall
position
16
Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener.
Position them behind the listener about 2 to 3 feet (60
to 100 cm) above ear level.
Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise sound positioning and to add
realistic ambience.
Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly behind, about 2 to
3 feet (60 to 100 cm) above ear level. Ideally they should be equidistant from the listener.
Corner
position
Connecting the AV controller
Connecting Your Speakers
The AV controller is designed to be used with a separate multichannel power amplifier. You connect the AV controller’s
PRE OUT jacks to the amplifier’s inputs, and connect your speakers to the amplifier’s speakers terminals. Speaker
settings such as crossover frequency and distance are set on the AV controller.
Speaker Configuration
For 9.2-channel surround-sound playback, you need nine speakers and two powered subwoofers.
The following table indicates the channels you should use depending on the number of speakers that you have.
Number of speakers:
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
Front left
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Front right
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Surround left
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Surround right
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Center
Surround back*
*
✓
Surround back left
✓
✓
✓
Surround back right
✓
✓
✓
Front high left
✓
✓
✓
Front high right
✓
✓
✓
Front wide left
✓
✓
✓
Front wide right
✓
✓
✓
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L output.
No matter how many speakers you use, two powered subwoofers are recommended for a really powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround sound system, you need to set the speaker settings. You can do this automatically
(see page 54) or manually (see page 98).
Note:
Front high and front wide speakers produce no sound at the same time.
Connecting Powered Subwoofers
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV controller’s PRE
OUT: SW1, SW2 to an input on your powered subwoofer, as shown. If your subwoofer is unpowered and
you’re using an external amplifier, connect the PRE
OUT: SW1, SW2 to an input on the amp.
You can connect the powered subwoofer with each jacks
respectively. Level and distance can be set individually
for each output. If you use one subwoofer, connect it to
PRE OUT: SW1.
You can also connect a powered subwoofer to the AV
controller’s balanced SUBWOOFER 1 PRE OUT XLR,
SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT XLR jack by using a balanced XLR cable.
You can connect the powered subwoofer with each jacks
respectively. Level and distance can be set individually
for each output. If you use one subwoofer, connect it to
SUBWOOFER 1 PRE OUT XLR.
Powered subwoofer
Powered subwoofer
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER 1
LINE INPUT
INPUT
SUBWOOFER 2
Balanced XLR cable
LINE INPUT
Balanced XLR cable
17
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Using Dipole Speakers
Normal speakers
Dipole speakers
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right, surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them
to indicate how they should be positioned. The surround
left and right dipole speakers should be positioned so
that their arrows point toward the TV/screen, while the
surround back left and right and front high left and right
and front wide left and right dipole speakers should be
positioned so that their arrows point toward each other,
as shown.
9
1
1
TV/screen
2
11
9
10
3
4
12
5
6
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1
11
1
TV/screen
2
4
3
12
5
6
8
Subwoofers
Front left speaker
Center speaker
Front right speaker
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left
speaker
10
7
8
8. Surround back right
speaker
9. Front high left speaker
10.Front high right speaker
11.Front wide left speaker
12.Front wide right speaker
Connecting a Power Amplifier with RCA Inputs
You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power amplifier with RCA input jacks by using a multichannel
RCA audio cable or several stereo RCA audio cables.
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
AV controller
Multichannel
power amplifier
FRONT HIGH/
FRONT WIDE
RIGHT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
SURROUND
RIGHT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
FRONT
RIGHT
CENTER
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SURROUND
LEFT
FRONT
LEFT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SURROUND BACK
LEFT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
FRONT HIGH/
FRONT WIDE
LEFT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL
FUSE
AC INLET
12V TRIGGER
IN
Front high/ Surround
Front wide/ back right
right speaker* speaker
Surround
right
speaker
Front right
speaker
Center
speaker
Front left
speaker
SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER
MODEL NO.
OUT
Surround
left
speaker
Surround
back left
speaker
RDA-7.1
Front high/
Front wide/
left speaker*
Note:
* Specify crossover frequency for the channel that you want to output in “Speaker Configuration” (see page 98).
18
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a Power Amplifier with XLR Inputs
You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power amplifier with balanced XLR input jacks by using several
XLR audio cables.
The AV controller’s balanced PRE OUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
AV controller
Multichannel
power amplifier
FRONT HIGH/
FRONT WIDE
RIGHT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
SURROUND
RIGHT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
FRONT
RIGHT
CENTER
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SURROUND
LEFT
FRONT
LEFT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SURROUND BACK
LEFT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
FRONT HIGH/
FRONTWIDE
LEFT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL
FUSE
AC INLET
12V TRIGGER
IN
Front high/ Surround
Front wide back right
right speaker* speaker
Surround Front right
right
speaker
speaker
Center
speaker
Front left
speaker
SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER
MODEL NO. RDA-7.1
OUT
Surround
left
speaker
Surround
back left
speaker
Front high/
Front wide
left speaker*
Note:
* Specify crossover frequency for the channel that you want to output in “Speaker Configuration” (see page 98).
19
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Bi-amping the Front Speakers
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can be used with front speakers and surround back speakers, respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that support bi-amping,
providing improved bass and treble performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to feed up to 7.2 speakers in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R outputs feed the front speakers’ woofer terminals. And the SURR BACK L/R
outputs feed the front speakers’ tweeter terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections shown below and turned on the AV controller, you must set
the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting to “Bi-Amp” to enable bi-amping (see page 51).
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.
AV controller
Multichannel
power amplifier
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
SURROUND
RIGHT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
FRONT
RIGHT
CENTER
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SURROUND
LEFT
FRONT
LEFT
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SURROUND BACK
LEFT
INPUT
SELECT
OUTPUT
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL
FUSE
AC INLET
12V TRIGGER
IN
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER
OUT
Surround left
speaker
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Front right speaker
20
Front left speaker
MODEL NO. RDA-7.1
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting Antenna
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
The AV controller won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the
antenna to use the tuner.
AM ANTENNA push terminals
FM ANTENNA jack
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
1
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
(North American models)
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead (see page 22).
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
1
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
2
Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM antenna push terminals, as shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around.)
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
(Australian models)
Push
Insert wire
Release
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
2
Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.
Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
your AV controller, TV, speaker cables, and
power cords.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 22).
Thumbtacks, etc.
Caution:
Be careful that you don’t injure yourself when
using thumbtacks.
21
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used
in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
Notes:
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possible noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If circumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.
TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV controller
22
To TV (or VCR)
Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed outside
horizontally, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the outdoor antenna should be right connected.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
AV Connection Color Coding
About AV Connections
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.
RCA-type AV connections are usually color-coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”). Use
white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.
Optical Digital Jacks
Left (white)
The AV controller’s optical digital jacks have shuttertype covers that open when an optical plug is inserted
and close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Caution:
To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug straight
when inserting and removing.
Right (red)
(Yellow)
Analog audio
Left (white)
Right (red)
Composite video
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connections can cause noise or malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep
audio and video cables away from
power cords and speaker cables.
(Yellow)
Right!
Wrong!
AV Cables & Jacks
Video / Audio
Cable
Jack
HDMI
HDMI
Description
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed standard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
Video
Y
Component
video cable
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality (some TV manufacturers label their
component video sockets slightly differently).
Y
PB/CB
PB/CB
PR/CR
PR/CR
S-Video cable
Composite
video cable
V
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and
provides better picture quality than composite video.
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.
Audio
OPTICAL
Optical digital
audio cable
Coaxial digital
audio cable
Balanced XLR
cable
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)
L
R
Offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy surround sound (e.g., Dolby Digital, DTS).
The audio quality is the same as for coaxial.
Offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy surround sound (e.g., Dolby Digital, DTS).
The audio quality is the same as for optical.
This cable carries analog audio. Balanced XLR
cables are used for better noise immunity and longer
cable runs.
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most common connection format for analog audio, and can be
found on virtually all AV components.
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1channel analog audio output. Several standard analog audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel cable.
The AV controller does not support SCART plugs.
23
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD/BD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until
now, several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable
can carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, and multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface)*1, so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV controller uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)*2, so only HDCP-compatible components
can display the picture.
The AV controller’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
x.v.Color, Deep Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby
Digital Plus, DSD, and Multichannel PCM
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS Express, DTS-HD High Resolution
Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio)
Your DVD/BD players must also support HDMI output of the above audio formats.
■ Integra/Onkyo
for System Control
, which stands for Remote Interactive over HDMI, is the name of the system control function found on Integra/Onkyo components. The AV controller can be used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows system
control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability between various components,
however, operation with components other than
-compatible components cannot be guaranteed.
• Set “HDMI Control (RIHD)” to “On” (page 116).
• See “Controlling a TV” (page 144) and “Controlling a DVD Player or DVD Recorder” (page 145) for operation.
Notes:
• Do not connect the
-compatible component more than the following number to the HDMI input terminal so
that the linked operations work properly.
a. DVD/BD player is up to three.
b. DVD/BD recorder is up to three.
c. Cable/Satellite Set-top box is up to four.
• Do not connect the AV controller to the other AV controller /AV amplifier via HDMI.
• When the
-compatible component more than the above-mentioned is connected, the linked operations are
not guaranteed.
• The
control does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use HDMI OUT MAIN instead.
About Copyright Protection
The AV controller supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)*2, a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV controller via HDMI must also support HDCP.
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry’s requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
24
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1:
Use HDMI cables to connect the AV controller’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD/BD player, TV,
projector, and so on.
Step 2:
Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector in the HDMI Input Setup (see page 47).
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI MAIN OUT and SUB OUT for
display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI output.
See “Video Connection Formats” on page 26 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
controller. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see
page 115).
Hint!
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers:
• Set the “TV Control” setting to “On” (see page 116) for an
-compatible TV.
• Set the “Audio TV Out” setting to “On” (see page 115) when the TV is not compatible with
or the “TV Control” setting to “Off”.
• Set your DVD/BD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
TV
DVD/BD player
HD camcorder, etc
Notes:
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need
to make a separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed. In
addition, video signals from a PC are not guaranteed.
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV controller, set the HDMI component so that its video can be
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI component connected to the AV controller). If the
TV power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no sound from the AV controller or the
sound may be cut off.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see page 115) to hear from your TV’s speakers, by controlling the
AV controller’s volume, the sound will be output from the AV controller’s speakers, too. When the “TV Control”
-compatible TV, by controlling the AV controller’s volume,
setting is set to “On” to hear from speakers of
the AV controller’s speakers will produce sound while the TV’s speakers are muted. To stop the AV controller’s
speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV controller’s volume.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be restricted by the connected source component. If the
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the connected
component’s instruction manual for details.
25
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting Both Audio & Video
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD/BD player and other AV components to the AV controller, you
can select both the audio and video simultaneously simply by selecting the appropriate input source on the AV controller.
: Signal Flow
Video
Video
Audio
Audio
TV, projector,
etc.
DVD/BD player, etc.
On
Power
On
Of f
Standby
Seven Channel Amplifier
RDA-7.1
Speakers
(See pages 17 to 19 for connection information)
Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV controller supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV controller by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV controller can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the “Monitor Out” setting,
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconversion (e.g., component video input through to component video output).
It is also recommended that you press the [VCR/DVR] and [Return] buttons on the AV controller at the same
time. Select “Skip” in the “VideoProcessor” setting by pressing the [Return] button repeatedly on the display. To
reset back to the original setting, press the same button at the same time.
■ “Monitor Out” Setting Set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI
DVD/BD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
Main” or “HDMI Sub” (see page 45), video input
signals flow through the AV controller as shown,
with composite video, S-Video, and component
HDMI
Composite
S-Video
Component
video sources all being upconverted for the
HDMI output. Use the “HDMI Main” or
IN
“HDMI Sub” setting if you connect the AV
controller’s HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI
AV controller
OUT SUB, respectively, to your TV.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
MONITOR OUT
video outputs pass through their respective input
Component
HDMI
S-Video
Composite
signals as they are.
Note:
If not connected to the same output you have
selected in the “Monitor Out” setting, the “MonTV, projector, etc.
itor Out” setting will be automatically switched
to “Analog” (see page 45). In this case, the setting of the output resolution will be that for HDMI output (see page 45). However, it will be switched to “1080i” when
“1080p” is selected, and to “Through” when “Auto” is selected.
26
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
■ “Monitor Out” Setting Set to “Both”, “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)”
DVD/BD player, etc.
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “Both”,
Video Signal Flow Chart
“Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” (see page 45),
video input signals flow through the AV controller as shown, with composite video, S-Video, and
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
component video sources all being upconverted
for both HDMI outputs. Use the “Both”,
IN
“Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” setting if you
connect the AV controller’s HDMI OUT
AV controller
MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB to your TVs.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective input
MONITOR OUT
Component
HDMI
S-Video
Composite
signals as they are.
Both: Video signals are output from both HDMI
outputs at the resolution supported by both TVs.
You cannot select “Resolution” setting. The picture adjust setting will be that for “HDMI Main”.
TV, projector, etc.
Both (Main): Video signals are output from both
HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT MAIN will
become a priority; depending on the resolution, video signals may not be output from HDMI OUT SUB.
Both (Sub): Video signals are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT SUB will become a priority; depending
on the resolution, video signals may not be output from HDMI OUT MAIN.
Note:
The “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to “Analog” (see page 45) if not connected to both outputs
when “Both” is selected or if not connected to a priority output when “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” is selected.
■ “Monitor Out” Setting Set to “Analog”
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “Analog”
(see page 45), video input signals flow through
the AV controller as shown, with composite
video and S-Video sources being upconverted for
the component video output. Use this setting if
you connect the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT to your TV.
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video and
S-Video is downconverted to composite video.
Note that these conversions only apply to the
MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not the
VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective input
signals as they are.
This signal flow also applies when the “Resolution” setting is set to “Through” (see page 45).
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” (see page 45), if the “Resolution” setting is
set to anything other than “Through” (see
page 45), the video signal flow will be as shown
here, with composite video and S-Video sources
being upconverted for the component video output.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective analog input signals as they are. HDMI input signals
are not output.
DVD/BD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
AV controller
MONITOR OUT
Composite
Component
S-Video
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
DVD/BD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
AV controller
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
27
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
controller by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial, analog multichannel, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV controller does not convert digital input signals for analog line outputs and vice
versa. For example, audio signals connected to
an optical or coaxial digital input are not output
by the analog TV/TAPE OUT.
DVD/BD player, etc.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
Analog Multichannel
Optical
Coaxial
HDMI
AV controller
Analog
HDMI
*1
TV, projector, etc.
*1 Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (see
page 115).
*2 Only the front L/R channels are output.
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will be selected automatically in the following order of priority:
HDMI, digital, analog.
28
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a TV or Projector
See “Connecting Components with HDMI” on page 24 for HDMI connection information.
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
TV, projector, etc.
A
B
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
⇒
Component video input
MONITOR OUT S
⇒
C
S-Video input
MONITOR OUT V
⇒
Composite video input
a
TV/TAPE IN L/R
⇐
Analog audio L/R output
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
⇐
Digital coaxial output
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (TV/TAPE)
⇐
Digital optical output
A
c
b
C
a
When you use connection b ,
you need to assign the digital
audio input (see page 49).
B
L
COAXIAL
OUT
Hint!
OPTICAL
OUT
TV, projector,
etc.
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite receiver
to the AV controller and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV controller (see pages 32
and 34).
29
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a DVD Player
See “Connecting Components with HDMI” on page 24 for HDMI connection information.
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
You must connect the AV controller to your TV via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your DVD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection a .
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
DVD player
A
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1 (DVD/BD)
⇐
Component video output
B
DVD/BD IN S
⇐
S-Video output
C
DVD/BD IN V
⇐
Composite video output
a
DVD/BD IN L/R
⇐
Analog audio L/R output
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD/BD)
⇐
Digital coaxial output
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME)
⇐
Digital optical output
A
c
b
C
When you use connection c , you
need to assign the digital audio input
(see page 49).
L
COAXIAL
OUT
30
OPTICAL
OUT
a
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD player
B
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD, and it has a multichannel analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV controller’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV controller’s MULTI CH:
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to the 7.1-channel analog audio
output on your DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the
AV controller’s SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 50.
To select the multichannel input, see “Audio Selector” on page 121. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 97.
7.1 ch
5.1 ch
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
SUB
WOOFER
R L
SURROUND
R
SURR
BACK
DVD player
31
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Playback
Hint!
With this hookup, you can use your VCR’s tuner to listen to your favorite TV programs via the AV
controller, useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
You must connect the AV controller to your TV via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to the VCR or DVD recorder in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a and
b , or a and c .)
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
A
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2 (CBL/SAT)
⇐
Component video output
B
VCR/DVR IN S
⇐
S-Video output
C
VCR/DVR IN V
⇐
Composite video output
a
VCR/DVR IN L/R
⇐
Analog audio L/R output
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
⇐
Digital coaxial output
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME)
⇐
Digital optical output
.
A
c
b
C
When you use connection c ,
you need to assign the digital
audio input (see page 49).
a
B
When you use connection A , you need
to assign the component video input
(see page 48).
L
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
VCR or DVD
recorder
32
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Recording
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( A or B ), and then make the connection. The
video source to be recorded must be connected to the AV controller via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Make the audio connection a .
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
A
VCR/DVR OUT S
⇒
S-Video input
B
VCR/DVR OUT V
⇒
Composite video input
a
VCR/DVR OUT L/R
⇒
Analog audio L/R input
B
a
VCR or DVD
recorder
L
A
R
AUDIO
IN
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
Notes:
• The AV controller must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s in Standby mode.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or playback VCR to the recording VCR without going through the AV
controller, connect the TV/VCR’s audio and video outputs directly to the recording VCR’s audio and video inputs.
See the manuals supplied with your TV and VCR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via composite video outputs. If your
TV/VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR must be connected to a composite video output.
Similarly, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via S-Video outputs. If your TV/VCR is
connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR must be connected to an S-Video output.
• Sources connected to a digital input cannot be recorded. Only analog inputs can be recorded.
33
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial Set-top box, or Other Video Source
Hint!
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV controller, useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
You must connect the AV controller to your TV via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
Video source
A
B
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2 (CBL/SAT)
⇐
Component video output
CBL/SAT IN S
⇐
S-Video output
CBL/SAT IN V
⇐
Composite video output
C
a
CBL/SAT IN L/R
⇐
Analog audio L/R output
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
⇐
Digital coaxial output
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME)
⇐
Digital optical output
A
c
b
C
When you use connection c , you
need to assign the digital audio
input (see page 49).
L
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
a
B
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Satellite, cable,
set-top box, etc.
34
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
You must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your game console ( a or b ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a
and b .)
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
Game console
A
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 (GAME)
⇐
Component video output
B
GAME IN S
⇐
S-Video output
C
GAME IN V
⇐
Composite video output
a
GAME IN L/R
⇐
Analog audio L/R output
b
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME)
⇐
Digital optical output
A
b
C
a
L
OPTICAL
OUT
B
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Game Console
35
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other Device
Step 1: Video Connection
Make the connection A .
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( a or b ), and then make the connection.
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
Camcorder etc.
A
AUX1 Input Video
⇐
Composite video output
a
AUX1 Input L-Audio-R
⇐
Analog audio L/R output
b
AUX1 Input Digital
⇐
Digital optical output
AUX1 Input
Video
AUX1 Input
L Audio R
a
A
Camcorder etc.
36
VIDEO
OUT
AUX1 Input
Digital
L AUDIO R
OUT
b
OPTICAL
OUT
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable
■ CD Player or Turntable (MM) with Built-in Phono Preamp
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player ( a , b , or c ). Use connection a for a turntable with a built-in
phono preamp.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
use a and b , or a and c .)
Connection
AV controller
Signal flow
CD or turntable
a
CD IN L/R
⇐
Analog audio L/R output
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
⇐
Digital coaxial output
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 3 (CD)
⇐
Digital optical output
b
COAXIAL
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
c
When you use
connection b , you
need to assign the
digital audio input
(see page 49).
IN
L
OPTICAL
IN 3
(CD)
L
R
a
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
CD
IN
L
a
R
CD
L
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
R
AUDIO
OUT
CD player
Turntable (MM) with
built-in phono preamp
■ Turntable (MM) with no Phono Preamp Built-in
The AV controller’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV controller’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turntable.
Notes:
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV controller’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting the
ground wire may produce an audible hum.
If this happens, disconnect it.
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge,
you’ll need a commercially available MC head amp or MC
transformer. Connect your turntable to the head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV controller’s PHONO IN
L/R jacks.
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turntable
with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono equalizer’s manual for details.
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
R
Turntable (MM) with no
phono preamp built-in
37
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches the recorder ( a , b or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections a and b , or a and c .
Connection
AV controller
a
TV/TAPE IN L/R
TV/TAPE OUT L/R
⇐
⇒
Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
⇐
Digital coaxial output
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (TV/TAPE)
⇐
Digital optical output
b
Signal flow Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder
COAXIAL
IN
a
L
IN 3
(CBL/SAT)
R
TV/TAPE
c
OPTICAL
a
IN 2
(TV/TAPE)
L
R
TV/TAPE
When you use connection b ,
you need to assign the digital
audio input (see page 49).
L
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
R
AUDIO
IN
L
R
AUDIO
OUT
Cassette, CDR, MD, or
DAT recorder
Connecting a Balanced Audio Source
You can connect a balanced audio source to the AV controller’s BALANCE L/R XLR jacks by using two XLR audio
cables. To use the balanced input, you must assign it to an input selector (see page 50). If you connect a mono source,
use the BALANCE L XLR jack and set the “Input Channel” setting to “Mono(L)” (see page 50). The AV controller’s
balanced INPUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.
2
1
3
Stereo audio source with
balanced XLR output
38
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting an RI Dock
Not all iPod models output video. For information
about which iPod models are supported by the RI
Dock, see the RI Dock’s instruction manual.
■ If Your iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV controller’s GAME IN or VCR/DVR IN L/R
jacks, and connect its video output jack to the AV
controller’s GAME IN V or VCR/DVR IN V jack.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
■ If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock
Connect its video output jack to the AV controller’s
GAME IN S or VCR/DVR IN S jack.
■ If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV controller’s TV/TAPE IN L/R jacks. (Onkyo DSA2 hookup shown below.)
IN
L
R
TV/TAPE
GAME
VCR/DVR
V
V
IN
IN
IN
GAME
IN
L
L
R
R
VCR/DVR
Make either
connection.
Notes:
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV controller’s remote controller for the first time
(see page 142).
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV controller with an u cable (see page 40).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/DOCK”.
• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to “DOCK” (see page 53).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Connecting a Universal Port Option Series
ex. UP-A1
Note:
When UP-A1 Dock that seated iPod is connected, the power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
39
Connecting the AV controller—Continued
Connecting Integra/Onkyo u
Components
IN
L
R
CD
Step 1:
Make sure that each Integra/Onkyo component is
connected to the AV controller with an analog audio
cable (connection a in the hookup examples) (see
pages 29 to 39).
Step 2:
Make the u connection (see illustration right).
Step 3:
If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI Dock, change the
Input Display (see page 53).
REMOTE
CONTROL
IN
L
R
DVD/BD
e.g., CD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
e.g., DVD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:
■ Auto Power On/Standby
When you start playback on a component connected
via u, if the AV controller is on Standby, it will
automatically turn on and select that component as
the input source. Similarly, when the AV controller is
set to Standby, all components connected via u
will also go on Standby.
■ Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected
via u, the AV controller automatically selects that
component as the input source.
■ Remote Control
You can use the AV controller’s remote controller to
control your other u-capable Integra/Onkyo components, pointing the remote controller at the AV
controller’s remote control sensor instead of the
component. You must enter the appropriate remote
control code first (see page 143).
Notes:
• Use only u cables for u connections. u cables
are supplied with Integra/Onkyo players (DVD, CD,
etc.).
• Some components have two u jacks. You can connect either one to the AV controller. The other jack is
for connecting additional u-capable components.
• Connect only Integra/Onkyo components to u jacks.
Connecting other manufacturer’s components may
cause a malfunction.
• Some components may not support all u functions.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Integra/Onkyo components.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
On/Standby and Direct Change u functions do not
work.
40
Connecting the Power Cord
Notes:
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of
your speakers and AV components.
• Turning on the AV controller may cause a momentary
power surge that might interfere with other electrical
equipment on the same circuit. If this is a problem,
plug the AV controller into a different branch circuit.
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied
with the AV controller. The supplied power cord is
designed exclusively for use with the AV controller
and should not be used with any other equipment.
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV controller while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Always
disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet first,
and then the AV controller.
Step 1:
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV controller’s AC INLET.
To AC wall outlet
Step 2:
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
Turning On the AV controller
Standby
On/Standby
Standby indicator
On
Receiver
Turning On and Standby
On the AV controller, press the [On/Standby] button.
AV controller
Remote
controller
or
On the remote controller, press the [Receiver] button, followed by the
[On] button.
The AV controller comes on, the display lights up, and the Standby indicator goes off.
Pressing the remote controller’s [On] button again will turn on any components
connected via u.
To turn the AV controller off, press the [On/Standby] button, or press the remote
controller’s [Standby] button. The AV controller will enter Standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises when you turn on the AV controller, always turn down the volume
before you turn it off.
Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps to help you configure the AV controller before you use it for the
very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Did you connect your TV to an HDMI output or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT?
If you did, “Monitor Setup” on page 42.
■ Run MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup—this is essential!
See “Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup” on page 54.
■ Have you connected a component to an HDMI input,
component video input, or digital audio input?
If you have, see “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47, “Component Video
Input Setup” on page 48, or “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 49
respectively.
■ Have you connected an Integra/Onkyo MD recorder, CD
recorder, or RI Dock?
If you have, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 53.
HDMI
OUT
IN
TV/TAPE
MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock
41
First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV controller for the very first time.
■ Change “Monitor Out” setting manually
Monitor Setup
If you connect your TV to HDMI OUT MAIN, “Monitor
Out” setting is automatically set so that the onscreen
setup menus are displayed and composite video, SVideo, and component video sources are upconverted*
and output.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
Monitor Out
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
Component video
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
42
Press the [Monitor Out] button.
The current setting is displayed.
2
Press the [Monitor Out] button
repeatedly to select: Analog,
HDMI Main, HDMI Sub, Both,
Both(Main) or Both(Sub)
For details on each item, see step 4 in
the page 45.
HDMI
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or
not to have the video sources’ images output through the
HDMI output, as well as whether to have the onscreen
setup menu output through the HDMI output or through
an analog output.
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT (not the HDMI output), “Monitor Out”
setting is automatically set so that the onscreen setup
menus are displayed and composite video and S-Video
sources are upconverted* and output.
Composite video, S-Video
1
Component video
Tips:
• The “Monitor Out” setting can also be set using the
[Video] button on the remote controller.
• This setting can also be performed by using Onscreen
Setup Menu (see page 45).
Notes:
• See page 26 for charts showing how the “Monitor
Out” and “Resolution” (see page 45) settings affect
the video signal flow through the AV controller.
• You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI
outputs and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
and have the AV controller upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV (see page 45).
First Time Setup—Continued
In this Instruction Manual, illustrations from the onscreen menu or explanations referring to the menu will be in the
same language as the Instruction Manual. The default Language setting for the onscreen menu is English. If your
Instruction Manual is in a language other than English, first follow the instructions below to change the Language.
Selecting the Language used for the
onscreen setup menus
3
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Chinese.
6–2. OSD Setup
Immediate Display
Display Position
TV Format
Language
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Language”, and
then use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select:
English, Deutsch, Français, Español,
Italiano, Nederlands, Svenska, 中文
5
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
qwer
Enter
Setup
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
On
Bottom
Auto
English
(Australian models)
Receiver
1
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “2. OSD Setup”,
and then press [Enter].
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.
Menu
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “6. Miscellaneous”, and then press [Enter].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
6. Miscellaneous
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Volume Setup
OSD Setup
12V Trigger A Setup
12V Trigger B Setup
12V Trigger C Setup
43
First Time Setup—Continued
Using the Display to change the
settings
The settings of the AV controller can be changed using
the Display.
1
Press the [Receiver] button followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu item appears on the
display.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select item and then
press [Enter].
The submenu item appears on the
display.
Press the [Setup] button to close the
menu.
Press the [Return] button to return to
the previous menu.
Receiver
qwer
Enter
Setup
Using the Onscreen Setup Menus
Carry out the settings for the AV controller by using the
Onscreen Setup Menu.
1
Press the [Receiver] button followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Menu
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
Tip:
On several functions, the explanation
will be displayed under the screen.
2
44
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select item and then
press [Enter].
The submenu appears.
Press the [Setup] button to close the
menu.
Press the [Return] button to return to
the previous menu.
Onscreen Setup Menus and Display
As each item in the Onscreen Setup Menus is selected,
the selected items will be displayed one by one.
Onscreen Setup Menus
Menu
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
Display
Note:
During Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the
TV screen will appear in the Display.
First Time Setup—Continued
4
Monitor Out Setup
If you connect your TV to the HDMI output, set the
“Monitor Out” setting so that the onscreen setup menus
are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources are upconverted and output.
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting so that
the onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite
video and S-Video sources are upconverted and output.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI
outputs and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
and have the AV controller upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV.
1
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press [Enter].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3
Monitor Out
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Analog Audio Input
Gamma Curve
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “1. Monitor Out”,
and then press [Enter].
The “Monitor Out” menu appears.
1–1. Monitor Out
Monitor Out
Resolution
Brightness
Contrast
Hue
Saturation
HDMI Main
Through
0
0
0
0
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Monitor Out”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
Analog:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, S MONITOR
OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
HDMI Main:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT MAIN.
HDMI Sub:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT SUB.
Both:
Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals are output from both HDMI
outputs at the resolution supported
by both TVs.
Both (Main):
Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals are output from both HDMI
outputs but HDMI OUT MAIN will
become a priority; depending on the
resolution, video signals may not be
output from HDMI OUT SUB.
Both (Sub):
Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals are output from both HDMI
outputs but HDMI OUT SUB will
become a priority; depending on the
resolution, video signals may not be
output from HDMI OUT MAIN.
Notes:
• If not connected to the same output
you have selected in the“Monitor
Out” setting, the “Monitor Out”
setting will be automatically
switched to “Analog”.
• When you select other than
“Analog”, the onscreen setup menus
are output by only the HDMI
outputs. If you’re not using the
HDMI output and select settings
by mistake and the menus
disappear, press the [Monitor Out]
button to select “Analog”.
• For Deep Color output, if the
“Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both
(Main)” or “Both (Sub)”, the number
of bit may be limited due to the
capability of your TV connected to a
priority output.
45
First Time Setup—Continued
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Resolution”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
Through:
Select this to pass video through the
AV controller at the same resolution
and with no conversion.
Auto * :
Select this to have the AV controller
automatically convert video at resolutions not supported by your TV.
480p (480p/576p):
Select this for 480p or 576p output
and video conversion as necessary.
720p:
Select this for 720p output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080i:
Select this for 1080i output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080p * :
Select this for 1080p output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080p/24 * :
Select this for 1080p output at 24
frames per second and video conversion as necessary.
Source:
Output will be according to the resolution level which was set in the
“Picture Adjust” setting (see
page 107).
Tips:
• The “Resolution” setting can also be
set using the [Video] button on the
remote controller.
• The “Resolution” setting is set
respectively of main, sub, and
analog.
Notes:
• Settings marked with an asterisk ( * )
are not available when the “Monitor
Out” setting is set to “Analog”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to
“Both”, this setting is fixed at
“Auto”.
• Depending on the incoming video
signal, video playback may not be
smooth or the vertical resolution may
be lowered. In this case select other
than “1080p/24”.
46
6
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Notes:
• See page 26 for charts showing how the “Monitor
Out” and “Resolution” settings affect the video signal
flow through the AV controller.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons,
and [Enter] button.
First Time Setup—Continued
Video Input Setup
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select an input selector,
and use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select:
HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4,
HDMI5, HDMI6, HDMI7:
Select the HDMI IN to which
the video component has
been connected.
- - - - -: Output composite video,
S-Video, and component
video sources from the HDMI
outputs. The video output signal from the HDMI outputs is
the one configured in “Component Video Input Setup”
(see page 48).
• Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to
more than one input selector. When
HDMI IN have already been
assigned, you must set first any
unused input selectors to “- - - - -” or
you will be unable to assign HDMI
IN to input selector.
• “AUX 1” is used only for digital
input from the front panel terminals.
5
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
HDMI Input Setup
If you connect a video component to HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD/BD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD/BD input selector.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with
an HDMI cable, you can set the AV controller so that
composite video, S-Video, and component video sources
are upconverted* and output by the HDMI output. You
can set this for each input selector by selecting the
“- - - - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
1
2
HDMI
Press the [Receiver] button followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press [Enter].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3
Monitor Out
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Analog Audio Input
Gamma Curve
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “2. HDMI Input”,
and then press [Enter].
The “HDMI Input” menu appears.
1–2. HDMI Input
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
AUX 1
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
FRONT
Notes:
• For composite video, S-Video, and component video
upconversion for the HDMI output, the “Monitor Out”
setting must be set to other than “Analog” (see
page 45), and the “HDMI Input” setting must be set to
“- - - - -”. See page 26 for more information on video
signal flow and upconversion.
• If no video component is connected to HDMI output
(even if the HDMI input is assigned), the AV
controller selects the video source based on the setting
of Component Video Input.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector, the
AV controller will select audio from HDMI IN as a
priority. See “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 49.
• The Tuner input selector cannot be assigned and is
fixed at the “- - - - -” option.
• If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1
Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT
jack, you cannot assign any input to Port selector.
• Do not assign the component connected with the
HDMI input to the TV/Tape selector when you set
“TV Control” setting to “On” (see page 116).
Otherwise, appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics
Control) operation is not guaranteed.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons,
and [Enter] button.
47
First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Input Setup
If you connect to a COMPONENT VIDEO IN or PC
INPUT ANALOG RGB, you must assign it to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD/BD
player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2, you should
assign it to the DVD/BD input selector.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with a
component video cable, you can set the AV controller so
that composite video and S-Video sources are
upconverted* and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT*1. You can set this for each input
selector by selecting the “- - - - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select an input selector,
and then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3.
PC IN: Select if the personal computer is connected to PC
INPUT ANALOG RGB.
- - - - -: Select if you are using the
HDMI outputs, rather than
the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT, for the output from
composite video, S-Video,
and component video
sources.
5
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Component video
IN
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
*1 Only when “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”.
1
2
Press the [Receiver] button followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press [Enter].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3
Monitor Out
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Analog Audio Input
Gamma Curve
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “3. Component
Video Input”, and then press
[Enter].
The “Component Video Input” menu
appears.
1–3. Component Video Input
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
AUX 1
48
IN1
----IN2
IN3
-----
Notes:
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, the
“Monitor Out” setting must be set to “Analog” (see
page 45), and the “Component Video Input” setting
must be set to “- - - - -”. See page 26 for more
information on video signal flow and upconversion.
• If not connected to the same output you have selected
in the “Monitor Out” setting, the “Monitor Out”
setting will be automatically switched to “Analog”
(see page 45).
• If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1
Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack,
you cannot assign any input to Port selector.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons,
and [Enter] button.
■ About PC Input
Signals from PC INPUT ANALOG RGB are output
from the HDMI output without the resolution
conversion.
Supported Resolution:
• VGA (640 × 480) 60/72/75/85 Hz
• SVGA (800 × 600) 56/60/72/75/85 Hz
• XGA (1024 × 768) 60/70/75/85 Hz
• SXGA (1280 × 1024) 60/75 Hz
Note:
The picture adjust setting is effective for only 60 Hz.
First Time Setup—Continued
Digital Audio Input Setup
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select an input selector,
and use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select “COAX1”,
“COAX2”, “COAX3”, “OPT1”,
“OPT2”, “OPT3”, or “- - - - - (analog)”.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an
input selector in “HDMI Input
Setup” on page 47, the AV controller
will select audio from HDMI IN as a
priority.
• Press the [Enter] button when you do
not use the signal of audio from the
HDMI IN. The “ * ” mark is displayed like “COAX1 * ”.
• “AUX 1” is used only for digital
input from the front panel terminals.
Examples:
If you connect your DVD player to the
OPTICAL IN 1 jack, set “DVD/BD” to
“OPT1”.
If you want to listen to audio from the
component connected to the OPTICAL
IN 2 jack when the VCR/DVR input
selector is selected, set “VCR/DVR” to
“OPT2”.
If you want to listen to audio from the
component connected to the
COAXIAL IN 1 jack when the CBL/
SAT input selector is selected, set
“CBL/SAT” to “COAX1”.
For input selectors that you don’t want
to assign a digital input jack, set to
“- - - - - (analog)”.
5
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
If you connect a component to a digital input jack, you
must assign that jack to an input selector. For example, if
you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN1 jack,
you should assign that jack to the CD input selector. By
default, the COAXIAL IN1 jack is assigned to the DVD/
BD input selector, although this can be changed.
Here are the default assignments.
Input selector
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
Game
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV/Tape
Tuner
CD
Phono
Port
Default assignment
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
FRONT (Fixed)
----OPT2
- - - - - (Fixed)
OPT3
---------
1
Press the [Receiver] button followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press [Enter].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3
Monitor Out
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Analog Audio Input
Gamma Curve
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “4. Digital Audio
Input”, and then press [Enter].
The “Digital Audio Input” menu
appears.
1–4. Digital Audio Input
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
AUX 1
Notes:
• Available sampling rate for PCM signals from a
digital input (optical and coaxial) is 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit.
• If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1
Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT
jack, you cannot assign any input to Port selector.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons,
and [Enter] button.
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
FRONT
49
First Time Setup—Continued
Analog Audio Input Setup
If you connect a component to the AV controller’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD/
BD player to the multichannel input, you must assign it
to the DVD/BD input selector.
If you connect a component to the AV controller’s
balanced input, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your CD player to
the balanced input, you must assign it to the CD input
selector.
1
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press [Enter].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
4
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select an input selector.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors:
“DVD/BD”, “VCR/DVR”, “CBL/
SAT”, “Game”, “AUX1”, “AUX2”,
“TV/Tape”, “CD”, or “Phono”. If you
don’t want to assign the multichannel
input, set to “- - - - -”.
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Balance”, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select an input selector:
You can assign the balanced input to
the following input selectors:
“DVD/BD”, “VCR/DVR”, “CBL/
SAT”, “Game”, “AUX1”, “AUX2”,
“TV/Tape”, “CD”, or “Phono”.
If you don’t want to assign the balanced
input, set to “- - - - -”.
6
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Input Channel”,
and use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select:
Stereo:
Select if the source is stereo and
you’ve connected it to the
INPUT:BALANCE L/R jacks.
Mono(L):
Select if the source is mono and
you’ve connected it to the
INPUT:BALANCE L jack.
7
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
1. Input/Output Assign
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3
Monitor Out
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Analog Audio Input
Gamma Curve
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “5. Analog Audio
Input”, and then press [Enter].
The “Analog Audio Input” menu
appears.
1–5. Analog Audio Input
Multich
Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Balance
Input Channel
----0dB
----Stereo
Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multichannel input or balanced input, press the [Audio] button and select the “Audio selector” (see page 121).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and
[Enter] button.
50
First Time Setup—Continued
Speaker Settings
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Speakers
Type(Front)”, and then use the
Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select:
Normal: Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers
normally.
Bi-Amp: Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers
for bi-amped operation.
Note:
Surround back speakers cannot be used
if you select “Bi-Amp”.
5
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
If you change these settings, you must run
Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup again (see page 54).
If you’ve fed your front speakers from the FRONT L/R
and SURR BACK L/R outputs for bi-amping, you must
change the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting. For hookup
information, see “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on
page 20.
Notes:
• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to
feed up to 7.2 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the
volume.
1
2
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
2. Speaker Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3
Speaker Settings
Speaker Configuration
Speaker Distance
Level Calibration
Equalizer Settings
THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “1. Speaker Settings”, and then press [Enter].
The “Speaker Settings” menu appears.
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speakers Type(Front)
Normal
51
First Time Setup—Continued
TV Format Setup (Australian models)
5
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.
1
Press the [Receiver] button followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
FM/AM Frequency Step Setup
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “6. Miscellaneous”, and then press [Enter].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
For FM/AM tuning to work properly, you must specify
the FM/AM frequency step used in your area. Note that
when this setting is changed, all radio presets are
deleted.
1
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
6. Miscellaneous
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3
Volume Setup
OSD Setup
12V Trigger A Setup
12V Trigger B Setup
12V Trigger C Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “2. OSD Setup”,
and then press [Enter].
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.
6–2. OSD Setup
Immediate Display
Display Position
TV Format
Language
4
52
On
Bottom
Auto
English
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “TV Format”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
Auto: Select this to automatically
detect the TV system from the
video input signals.
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
your area is NTSC.
PAL: Select if the TV system in
your area is PAL.
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
First Time Setup—Continued
3
Game TV/Tape
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “3. Tuner”, and
then press [Enter].
The “Tuner” menu appears.
(North American models)
7–3. Tuner
FM/AM Frequency Step
SAT Radio Mode
200kHz/10kHz
None
VCR/DVR
(Australian models)
1
7–3. Tuner
AM Frequency Step
4
Press the [TV/Tape], [Game] or
[VCR/DVR] input selector button
so that “TV/TAPE”, “GAME” or
“VCR/DVR” appears on the display.
9kHz
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
or
(North American models)
200kHz/10kHz:
Select if 200 kHz/10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
50kHz/9kHz:
Select if 50 kHz/9 kHz steps are
used in your area.
or
(Australian models)
10kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
9kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
in your area.
5
2
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
or
Press and hold down the [TV/
Tape], [Game] or [VCR/DVR]
input selector button (about 3
seconds) to change the setting.
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
For the TV/Tape input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
or
Changing the Input Display
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TV/TAPE IN/
OUT jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME IN or
VCR/DVR IN jacks, for u to work properly, you must
change this setting.
This setting can only be changed on the AV controller.
→
→
TV/TAPE → MD → CDR
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
DOCK
For the Game input selector, the setting
changes in this order:
GAME ↔ DOCK
For the VCR/DVR input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
VCR/DVR ↔ DOCK
(3 seconds)
Notes:
• DOCK can be selected for the TV/Tape or Game or
VCR/DVR input selector, but not at the same time.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before
using the AV controller’s remote controller for the first
time (see page 142).
53
First Time Setup—Continued
Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room
Correction and Speaker Setup
With the supplied calibrated microphone,
Audyssey MultEQ XT automatically determines the
number of speakers connected, their size for purposes of
bass management, optimum crossover frequencies to the
subwoofer (if present), and distances from the primary
listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ XT then removes the distortion
caused by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical
problems over the listening area in both the frequency
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced
sound for everyone. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ XT
allows you to also use Audyssey Dynamic EQ™, which
maintains the proper octave-to-octave balance at any
volume level (see page 104).
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
If Audyssey Dynamic EQ is set to “On”,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ becomes available.
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking
into account human perception and room acoustics.
Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency response
and surround levels moment-by-moment at any userselected volume setting. The result is bass response,
tonal balance, and surround impression that remain
constant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ
combines information from incoming source levels
with actual output sound levels in the room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness correction solution.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with
Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well-balanced
sound for every listener at any volume level.
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud
passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume setting by the user and then monitors
how the volume of program material is being perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether an
adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary, Dynamic
Volume makes the necessary rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback volume level
while optimizing the dynamic range.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic
Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted
automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain
the same whether watching movies, flipping between
television channels, or changing from stereo to surround sound content.
54
Measurement Positions
To create a listening environment in your home theater
that all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey MultEQ XT takes
measurements at up to eight positions within the
listening area.
■ First measurement point
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position this
refers to the most central position where one would
normally sit within the listening environment.
MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and
the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
■ Second−eighth measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
: listening area
–
: listening position
First Time Setup—Continued
Using Audyssey MultEQ® XT
1
Turn on the AV controller and the
connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV controller is connected.
2
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main Listening Position a (page 54), and connect it
to the Setup Mic jack.
The speaker setting menu appears.
On/Standby
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speakers Type
Front High/Front Wide Preout
Normal
Front High
Speaker setup
microphone
If you change “Speakers Type”
settings, refer to step 4 on “Speaker
Settings” (page 51).
In accordance with the connected
speakers, set the “Front High/Front
Wide Preout” setting to “Front High” or
“Front Wide”.
qwer
Enter
3
When you’ve finished, press the
[Enter] button.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Please place setup microphone at
center of listening area at
ear height.
Notes:
• If the AV controller is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when Audyssey MultEQ XT
Room Correction and Speaker Setup starts.
• Room correction and speaker setup cannot be
performed while a pair of headphones is
connected.
• It takes about 30 minutes to complete the room
correction and speaker setup for eight positions.
Total measurement time varies depending on the
number of speakers.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the room correction and speaker setup,
unless you want to cancel the setup.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the room correction and speaker setup.
Next
Notes:
• Before starting Audyssey MultEQ
XT Room Correction and Speaker
Setup, arrange the room and connect
the speakers as you would for
enjoying movies. Changes to the
room after auto setup requires you
run the auto setup again, as room EQ
characteristics may have changed.
• When starting the room correction
and speaker setup, do not stand
between the speakers and
microphone, and avoid obstacles
blocking the path between speakers
and microphone. This will produce
inaccurate results.
• Position the microphone at ear height
of a seated listener with the
microphone tip pointed directly at
the ceiling using a tripod. Do not
hold the microphone in your hand
during measurements as this will
produce inacurate results.
55
First Time Setup—Continued
• Make the room as quiet as possible.
Background noise can disrupt the
room measurements. Close
windows, silence cell phones,
televisions, radios, air conditioners,
fluorescent lights, home appliances,
light dimmers, or other devices.
• Cell phones should be turned off or
placed away from all audio
electronics during the measurement
process as Radio Frequency
Interference (RFI) may cause
measurement disruptions (even if the
cell phone is not in use).
4
6
When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.
7
After the 3rd to the 8th measurement, the following screen
appears.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Please select [Next], when measuring next position,
and select [Finish], when ending.
Next
Finish(Calculate)
Press [Enter].
The room correction and speaker setup
starts.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select an option, and then
press [Enter].
Next:
Select “Next” to begin measuring
the next measurement position.
After the 8th measurement has been
taken, the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Finish(Calculate):
Select this if you don’t want to
measure any more listening positions and are ready to calculate the
results, then go to step 8.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Do not unplug setup microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now measuring. . .
Test tones are played through each
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ® XT
Room Correction and Speaker Setup
runs. This process takes a few minutes.
Please refrain from talking during
measurements and do not stand
between speakers and the microphone.
5
8
When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
The following screen appears.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Calculating...
Please place setup microphone at 2nd position at
ear height.
Next
Place the setup microphone at
the next position (page 54), and
then press [Enter].
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few
minutes.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Do not unplug setup microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now measuring. . .
56
First Time Setup—Continued
9
When the calculations are complete, the following screen
appears.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
-- Review SP Configuration -Subwoofer
No
Front
Full Band
Center
40Hz
Surround
120Hz
Front Wide
None
Front High
None
Surr Back
150Hz
Surr Back Ch
2ch
Save
Cancel
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select an option, and then
press [Enter].
The options are:
Save:
Save the calculated settings and exit
the room correction and speaker
setup.
Cancel:
Cancel the room correction and
speaker setup.
Note:
You can view the calculated settings for
the speaker configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels by using the
Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons.
10
If you selected “Save”, the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Saving...
Notes:
• When the room correction and speaker setup is
complete, the “Equalizer Settings” (page 100) will be
set to “Audyssey” and “Dynamic EQ” (page 104) will
be set to “On”.
• You can cancel the Room Correction and Speaker
Setup at any point in this procedure simply by
disconnecting the setup microphone.
Error Messages
While the room correction and speaker setup is in
progress, one of the following error messages may
appear:
❏ Ambient noise is too high.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Ambient noise is too high.
Retry
Cancel
This message appears if the background noise is too
loud and the measurements cannot be performed
properly.
Remove the source of the noise and try again.
Retry: Return to the measured point immediately
before and start set up again.
Cancel: Cancel the room correction and speaker setup.
❏ Speaker Detect Error
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected.
Tip:
See “Speaker Configuration” (page 17) for appropriate
settings.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
11
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
Disconnect the speaker setup
microphone.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
:
:
:
:
:
:
No
-----------
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
---------------
Retry
Cancel
The front speaker has not been detected.
Please, unplug setup microphone.
57
First Time Setup—Continued
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
--No
Yes
--Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
Speaker Detect Error
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
No
--No
Yes
-------
Retry
Cancel
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
--No
Yes
--Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
Yes
-------
Retry
Cancel
One of the front speakers has not been detected.
The front high speakers have been detected but the
surround speakers haven’t.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
--Yes
No
--Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
----No
No
-------
Retry
Cancel
One of the front wide speakers has not been
detected.
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
--Yes
No
--Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
Yes
No
-------
Retry
Cancel
The front wide speakers have been detected but the
surround speakers haven’t.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
--No
Yes
--Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
------No
-------
Retry
Cancel
One of the front high speakers has not been detected.
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
--No
No
No
Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
-----
Retry
Cancel
The right surround back speaker has been detected
but the left surround back speaker hasn’t.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
-----
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
Retry
Cancel
One of the surround speakers has not been detected.
Speaker Detect Error
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
--No
No
--Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
Yes
--No
No
Yes
Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
No
No
-----
Retry
Cancel
The left surround back speaker has been detected but
the surround speaker hasn’t.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
-----
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
Retry
Cancel
The surround back speakers have been detected but
the surround speakers haven’t.
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Retry
Cancel
Subwoofer 2 has been detected but Subwoofer 1 has
not.
58
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
: Error
: Yes
: --: --: Yes
: Yes
FR
SR
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
----Yes
Yes
Yes
Retry
Cancel
The speaker type detected does not match what was
expected. The speaker may be incorrect type or broken. Please check that it is the correct speaker type.
❏ Speaker Matching Error!
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Matching Error!
Retry
Cancel
If you wish to make changes to the settings found during
the room correction and speaker setup, follow the
directions on pages 98 to 101.
Notes:
• Please note that THX recommends any THX main
speakers be set to “80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your
speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT Room
Correction and Speaker Setup, please make sure
manually that any THX speakers are set to 80 Hz
(THX) crossover (see page 98).
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of
subwoofers and the interaction with the room, THX
recommends setting the level and the distance of the
subwoofer manually.
• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may
notice irregular results when setting the level and/or
distance of the main speakers. If this happens, THX
recommends setting them manually.
Using Powered Subwoofers
The number of speakers detected on the second measurement and later was different to the number
detected on the first measurement.
Make sure speakers that could not be detected are
connected properly.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the room correction and speaker setup.
❏ Writing Error!
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Writing Error!
If you’re using powered subwoofers that output very
low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be
detected by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction
and Speaker Setup.
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review SP
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s
volume to the half-way point, set it to its highest
crossover frequency, and then try running
Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker
Setup again. Note that if the volume is set too high and
the sound distorts, detection issues may occur, so use an
appropriate volume level. If the subwoofer has a lowpass filter switch, set it to Off or Direct. Refer to your
subwoofer’s instruction manual for details.
Retry
Cancel
This message appears if saving fails.
Try saving again. If this message appears after 2 or 3
attempts, the AV controller is probably malfunctioning.
Contact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the room correction and speaker setup.
59
Basic Operations
Selecting the Input Source
This section explains how to select the input source (i.e., the AV component that you want to listen to or watch).
Master Volume
Input
Selector
Receiver
VOL q/w
Input selector buttons
1
AV controller
Remote
controller
Use the AV controller’s input selector buttons to select the input
source.
To select the input source with the remote controller, press the
[Receiver] button, and then press the Input Selector buttons.
or
2
Start playback on the source component.
When you select DVD or another video component, on your TV, you’ll need
to select the video input that’s connected to the AV controller’s HDMI outputs,
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to turn on the digital audio output.
3
AV controller
Remote
controller
or
4
60
To adjust the volume, use the Master Volume control, or the remote
controller’s VOL [q]/[w] button.
The volume can be set to –Q dB, –81.5 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).
The AV controller is designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, allowing precise adjustment.
The volume level can also be displayed as an absolute value. See “Volume
Setup” on page 112.
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 84.
Basic Operations—Continued
Notes:
• This setting is not available when the multichannel
Analog input is selected.
• To bypass the bass and treble tone circuits, select the
Direct or THX listening mode.
Display
Displaying Source Information
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
Tone, –, +
Remote
controller
Dimmer
Display
Press
[Receiver]
first.
Press the [Receiver] button, and
then press the [Display] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
Muting
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Display] button.
The following information can typically be displayed for
input sources.
Dimmer
Sleep
Input source
Listening
mode
Adjusting the Bass & Treble
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,
except when the Direct or THX listening mode is
selected.
1
AV controller
2
AV controller
Press the [Tone] button repeatedly to select either “Bass” or
“Treble” for each speaker or subwoofer.
Use the Down and Up [–]/[+] buttons to adjust.
Signal format*
Sampling
frequency
Input Signal
Resolution
Output
Resolution
*
If the input signal is analog, no format information is displayed.
If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is displayed.
If the input signal is digital but not PCM, the signal format and
the number of channels is displayed. For some digital input signals, including multichannel PCM, the signal format, number of
channels, and sampling frequency is displayed.
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the previously displayed information reappears.
Tip:
This procedure can also be performed
on the remote controller by using
[Audio] button (see page 119).
■ Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output by the
front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output by
the front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps.
61
Basic Operations—Continued
Setting the Display Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the AV controller’s display.
Remote
controller
Press the [Receiver] button, and
then press the [Dimmer] button
repeatedly to select: dim, dimmer, or normal brightness.
Alternatively, you can use the AV controller’s [Dimmer] button (North
American models).
Muting the AV Controller
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV controller.
Remote
controller
Press the [Receiver] button, and
then press the [Muting] button.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display, as
shown.
Using the Sleep Timer
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV controller to
turn off automatically after a specified period.
Remote
controller
Press the [Receiver] button, and
then press the [Sleep] button
repeatedly to select the required
sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set. The specified sleep time appears on
the display for about five seconds, then
the previous display reappears.
If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press the [Sleep]
button repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
To check the time remaining until the AV controller
sleeps, press the [Sleep] button. Note that if you press the
[Sleep] button while the sleep time is being displayed,
you’ll shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes.
Using Headphones
You can connect a pair of stereo headphones (1/4-inch
phone plug) to the AV controller’s Phones jack for private listening, as shown.
To unmute the AV controller, press the
[Muting] button again, or adjust the
volume.
The Mute function is cancelled when
the AV controller is set to Standby.
Tip:
You can specify how much the output is muted with the
“Muting Level” setting (page 112).
Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the Phones
jack, the Headphone indicator, speaker/channel indicator FL and FR light up.
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono or Direct.
• The following listening modes can be used with headphones (the listening modes available also depend on
the currently selected input source): Stereo, Direct,
and Mono.
62
Basic Operations—Continued
Using Easy Macros
My Music (default):
1. The Integra/Onkyo CD player connected to the AV controller is
turned on.
2. The AV controller is turned on.
3. The input selector of the AV controller is set to “CD”.
4. The player starts playback.
Note:
Once you start the Easy macro command, you cannot use other Activities
buttons during the execution. If you
want to operate other components halfway, press the [All Off] to stop and
press desired Activities button.
Using the Easy macro command in the Easy macro
mode, you can sequentially operate Integra/Onkyo components with simple commands by simply pressing one
button. These commands are user-specifiable (see
page 151) and the default actions are described below.
Press the Activities buttons to start the Easy macro command.
Once the AV controller has entered the normal macro
mode, all of the Activities buttons will automatically
switch to the normal macro mode. In this case, pressing
the [All Off] button will set only the AV controller to
Standby mode.
Activities
buttons
All Off,
My Movie,
My TV,
My Music
Receiver
Audio
1
2
Press the [All Off] button.
1. The connected component stops
and turns off.
2. The AV controller turns off.
3. The TV connected to the AV controller turns off (Standby). *2*3
*1. Depending on the start-up time of the DVD/BD player, the AV
controller may not activate this playback command. In this case,
press the Play [1] button on the remote controller.
*2. When [My Music] is selected, with the default settings, this will
not be performed.
*3. With some televisions, the power may not be turned off (or enter
standby).
Press the [My Movie], [My TV], or
[My Music] button.
My Movie (default):
1. The TV connected to the AV controller is turned on.
2. The Integra/Onkyo DVD player
connected to the AV controller is
turned on.
3. The AV controller is turned on.
4. The input selector of the AV controller is set to “DVD/BD”.
5. The player starts playback. *1
My TV (default):
1. The TV connected to the AV controller is turned on.
2. The cable set-top box connected to
the AV controller is turned on.
3. The AV controller is turned on.
4. The input selector of the AV controller is set to “CBL/SAT”. You
can enjoy cable TV.
63
Basic Operations—Continued
Changing Source Component
When you want to operate the component that is not
assigned as the source component, you can assign it as
the source component. For the default assignment, see
page 152.
(3 seconds)
While holding down the Remote
Mode button, press and hold
down the [My Movie], [My TV], or
[My Music] button (about 3 seconds).
The Activities buttons that you pressed
flashes twice, indicating that the setting
has been established.
Examples:
When you press the [My Music] button
and want to start the Onkyo Cassette
recorder, while holding down [TV/
Tape] button, press and hold down the
[My Music] button (about 3 seconds)
flashes twice.
Tip:
This procedure can also be performed
via onscreen menu (see page 151).
Restoring Default
1
While holding down the [Audio]
button, press and hold down the
[All Off] button until the All Off
button lights up (about 3 seconds).
(3 seconds)
2
64
Release the [Audio] and [All Off]
buttons and press the [All Off]
button again.
The [All Off] button flashes twice.
Listening to the Radio
Using the Tuner
TUNED
AUTO
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations. You can store your favorite stations as presets
for quick selection.
FM STEREO
Tuner
■ Manual Tuning Mode
Tuning Mode
Tuning /
1
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the display.
2
Press and hold the Tuning Up or
Down [q]/[w] buttons.
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
Press the buttons repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.
Listening to the Radio
Use the [Tuner] input selector
button to select either AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Each time you press the [Tuner] button,
the input source changes between AM
and FM.
Band
Frequency
(Actual display depends on country.)
Tuning into Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode
1
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.
2
Press the Tuning Up or Down [q]/
[w] buttons.
Searching stops when a station is
found.
This model changes FM/AM frequency in 200k/10k (or
50k/9k) Hz steps.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Tuning into weak FM stereo stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering the appropriate frequency.
1
Remote
controller
Press the [Tuner] button repeatedly to select AM or FM, followed
by the [D.TUN] button.
(Actual display depends on country.)
2
Remote
controller
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator appears on the display, as shown.
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
65
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Presetting AM/FM Stations
Memory
AV controller
Preset e/r
To select a preset, use the Preset
[e]/[r] buttons, or the remote
controller’s CH [+/–] button.
or
Remote
controller
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM/FM radio stations as presets.
or
1
Tune into the AM/FM station that
you want to store as a preset.
2
Press the [Memory] button.
The preset number flashes.
3
While the preset number is flashing (about 8 seconds), use the
Preset [e]/[r] buttons to select a
preset from 1 through 40.
4
You can also use the remote controller’s number buttons to select
a preset directly.
Deleting Presets
Memory, Tuning Mode
Press the [Memory] button again
to store the station or channel.
The station or channel is stored and the
preset number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your
favorite AM/FM radio stations.
Note:
You can name your radio presets for easy identification
(see page 107). Its name is displayed instead of the band
and frequency.
Selecting Presets
Preset e/r
66
Remote
controller
1
Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
2
While holding down the [Memory] button, press the [Tuning
Mode] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to Satellite Radio
(North American models)
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your Sirius-Ready receiver. SIRIUS Satellite Radio is available
to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and
Canada.
Indoor/outdoor antenna
with 21-foot cable
SiriusConnect
receiver
8-pin mini DIN
connector cable
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free
music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country,
R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams.
Additional programming includes expert sports talk,
uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most
trusted sources.
Once you’ve purchased a SIRIUS tuner you’ll need to
activate it and subscribe to begin enjoying the service.
Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the SIRIUS tuner. There are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of
adding “The Best of XM” programming to the SIRIUS
service. The Best of XM service is not available to SIRIUS Canada subscribers at this time. Please check with
SIRIUS Canada for any updates using the numbers and
web address below.
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict
channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for
children.
SIRIUS jack
AV controller
To use the included antenna indoors, you must place it at
a north-, west-, or east-facing window, depending on
where you live. If this isn’t possible, you’ll need to
install it outside, away from any overhead obstructions.
Positioning the Antenna
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be
positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine
which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly.
SKY
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers
can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and
Hawaii.
Setting Up the SiriusConnect™ Home
Tuner
The optional SiriusConnect Home tuner kit includes
everything for easy home installation, including the SiriusConnect receiver, indoor/outdoor antenna with 21foot cable, 8-pin mini DIN connector cable, and an AC
power adapter. See the SiriusConnect Home tuner’s
instructions for more information.
Use the 8-pin mini DIN connector cable to connect the
SiriusConnect receiver to the SIRIUS jack on the rear of
the AV controller.
AC power
NORTH
WEST
1
4
5
EAST
3
2
HORIZON
SOUTH
Area 1: Point the antenna toward the sky in the east,
northeast, or southeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 2: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 3: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northwest, either through a window or outside.
Area 4: Point the antenna toward the sky in the west,
northwest, or southwest, either through a window or
outside.
Area 5: Put the antenna outside and point it straight up.
The antenna cannot be used indoors.
67
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
3
Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you
must set the “SAT Radio Mode” to “SIRIUS”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “3. Tuner”, and
then press [Enter].
The “Tuner” screen appears.
7–3. Tuner
FM/AM Frequency Step
SAT Radio Mode
200kHz/10kHz
None
Receiver
qwer
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “SAT Radio Mode”,
and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select “SIRIUS”.
Pressing the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons cycles through the following
options: None Q SIRIUS
None: Select if you’re not using
Satellite Radio.
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
5
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Enter
Setup
1
Remote
controller
2
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
68
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Remote
controller
Press the [Receiver] button, and
then press the [Tuner] button
repeatedly to select “SIRIUS”.
If “CHECK SR TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is connected properly. If
“ANTENNA ERROR” appears, make
sure the antenna is connected properly.
Tuner
Receiver
qwer
Enter
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller. Press the [Tuner] button repeatedly to select “SIRIUS”.
Signing Up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Before you can use SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must
first sign up for an account. You’ll need a major credit
card and your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID, which you can
get from the AV controller, as explained below, or from
the SiriusConnect Home tuner package.
Tuning q/w
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels
There are three ways to select SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channels:
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by category.
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.
■ Channel Search Mode
1
Remote
controller
1
AV controller
Press the [Tuner] button, and
then press the [Enter] button
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode.
Use the Tuning Up and Down [q]/
[w] buttons to select channel 0.
Your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID number is displayed. Write it below.
2
ID
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select a channel.
Channel number
2
To sign up, go to:
http://activate.siriusradio.com
or call: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474)
Channel name
Note:
Your ID is also displayed on the Satellite Radio screen.
See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home Antenna” on
page 76.
You can also use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select a category.
69
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Direct Tuning
You can select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel directly
by entering its number.
Tuner
CH +/–
1
Remote
controller
qwer
Press the [Tuner] button, followed by the [D.TUN] button.
Return
2
Number
buttons
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0.
D.TUN
■ Category Search Mode
1
Remote
controller
Press the [Tuner] button, and
then press the [Enter] button
repeatedly to select Category
Search mode.
Notes:
• If you select an unavailable channel, “INVALID
CHANNEL” appears on the display.
• If you select a channel that you are not subscribed to,
“CALL SIRIUS” appears on the display.
• Channels that are locked must be unlocked before you
can listen to them. See “SIRIUS Parental Lock” on
page 72 for more information.
■ Selecting the Previous Channel
2
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select a channel in that
category.
AV controller
or
Remote
controller
70
To listen to the previously
selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel, press the [Return] button.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Selecting Channels on the AV Controller
Presetting SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels
Tuning q/w
Return
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels and AM/FM radio stations as presets.
Tuner
Tuning Mode
1
AV controller
Enter
Press the [Tuner] button repeatedly to select “SIRIUS”.
Memory
1
Tune into the SIRIUS channel that
you want to store as a preset.
2
Press the [Memory] button.
The preset number flashes.
AV controller
2
3
4
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode or Category Search
mode.
3
While the preset number is flashing (about 8 seconds), use the
Preset [e]/[r] buttons to select a
preset from 1 through 40.
4
Press the [Memory] button again
to store the channel.
The channel is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your
favorite SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels.
Press the [Enter] button repeatedly to select a category.
Use the Tuning Up and Down [q]/
[w] buttons to select a channel.
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.
Tuning Mode Preset e/r
71
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Selecting Presets
AV controller
To select a preset, use the Preset
[e]/[r] buttons, or the remote
controller’s CH [+/–] button.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
With SIRIUS Parental Lock, you can lock out channels
that you do not want to receive and use a 4-digit PIN
number to prevent others from unlocking them.
or
Remote
controller
Receiver
qwer
Enter
You can also use the remote
controller’s number buttons to
select a preset directly.
Setup
1
Remote
controller
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
■ Deleting Presets
1
Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
2
While holding down the
[Memory] button, press the [Tuning Mode] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
AV controller
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
72
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
Listening to the Radio—Continued
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “3. Tuner”, and
then press [Enter].
The “Tuner” screen appears.
5
7–3. Tuner
FM/AM Frequency Step
SAT Radio Mode
Antenna Aiming
SIRIUS Parental Lock
200kHz/10kHz
SIRIUS
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the PIN number.
If you’re entering the PIN number for
the very first time, the PIN is stored,
and the following screen appears.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
Edit Code
Parental Lock
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “SIRIUS Parental
Lock”, and then press [Enter].
The “SIRIUS Parental Lock” screen
appears.
If you’ve already set a PIN number, you
must enter the correct PIN to get to this
screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
Enter Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note:
The “SIRIUS Parental Lock” cannot be
set unless the AV controller and the SiriusConnect receiver are connected.
9
Note:
If the “SAT Radio Mode” is set to
“None” (see page 68), the “SIRIUS
Parental Lock” item is not available.
->
6
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Parental Lock”,
and then press [Enter].
The “Parental Lock” screen appears.
7
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select a channel, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select “Locked” or
“Unlocked”.
The number, name, and status of the
currently selected channel is displayed.
73
Listening to the Radio—Continued
8
When you’ve finished, press
[Enter] to save your changes, or
press [Return] to return to the
previous screen without saving.
When [Enter] is pressed, the confirmation message “Locked” or “Unlocked”
appears.
9
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
3
Notes:
• While a channel is locked, it cannot be selected for
listening.
• To unlock a channel, you must enter the correct PIN
number and change it to Unlocked in step 6.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and
[Enter] button.
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “3. Tuner”, and
then press [Enter].
The “Tuner” screen appears.
7–3. Tuner
FM/AM Frequency Step
SAT Radio Mode
Antenna Aiming
SIRIUS Parental Lock
200kHz/10kHz
SIRIUS
Changing the PIN Number
4
Receiver
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “SIRIUS Parental
Lock”, and then press [Enter].
The “SIRIUS Parental Lock” screen
appears.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
qwer
Enter Code
Enter
Setup
1
Remote
controller
74
0
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Note:
If the “SAT Radio Mode” is set to
“None” (see page 68), the “SIRIUS
Parental Lock” item is not available.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
5
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the PIN number.
If you’re entering the PIN number for
the very first time, the PIN is stored,
and the following screen appears.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
8
Confirm the new PIN number by
entering it again.
If you confirm the PIN number correctly, the new PIN is saved and the
message “Complete” appears.
If you confirm the PIN number incorrectly, “Wrong Code!” appears, and
you’ll be returned to step 5 to try again.
9
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
->
Edit Code
Parental Lock
If you’ve already set a PIN number, you
must enter the correct PIN to get to this
screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Information
Display
Note:
The “SIRIUS Parental Lock” cannot be
set unless the AV controller and the SiriusConnect receiver are connected.
6
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Edit Code”, and
then press [Enter].
The “New Code” screen appears.
Remote
controller
Press the [Display] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
New Code
The following information can be displayed:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Channel name
Category
7
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the new PIN number.
The “Confirm” screen appears.
SIRIUS Parental Lock
Confirm
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Artist/composer
Song title
Listening mode
Note:
If the category, artist/composer, or song title is not available, “- - -” will be displayed instead.
9
75
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna
3
You can check the strength of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signal and adjust the position of the SiriusConnect Home
antenna accordingly.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “3. Tuner”, and
then press [Enter].
The “Tuner” screen appears.
7–3. Tuner
FM/AM Frequency Step
SAT Radio Mode
Antenna Aiming
SIRIUS Parental Lock
200kHz/10kHz
SIRIUS
Tuner
Receiver
qwer
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Antenna Aiming”,
and then press [Enter].
The Satellite Radio screen appears.
The name of the currently selected
input selector is displayed in a box.
5
Position the SiriusConnect Home
antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
SIRIUS Satellite signal strength
meter.
Enter
Setup
1
Remote
controller
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Tuner] button, and
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Antenna Aiming
SIRIUS
Satellite
SIRIUS ID
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
Note:
If the “SAT Radio Mode” is set to
“None” (see page 68), the “Antenna
Aiming” item is not available.
76
Terrestrial
------------
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the SiriusConnect Home
antenna so that as many bars as possible
(up to 3) appear on the SIRIUS Terrestrial signal strength meter.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
SIRIUS Satellite Radio by using either satellite or terrestrial reception.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
• The SIRIUS information on the Satellite Radio screen
is only displayed when the “SAT Radio Mode” is set
to “SIRIUS” (see page 68).
Listening to the Radio—Continued
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Messages
The following messages may appear while using SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
❑ ACQUIRING SIGNAL
The SiriusConnect receiver is acquiring the signal or
no signal is present. Make sure the SiriusConnect
Home tuner is connected properly and that there are
no obstacles nearby.
❑ ANTENNA ERROR
Make sure the SiriusConnect Home tuner is connected properly.
❑ SUBSCRIPTION UPDATED
Displayed while your subscription is being updated.
No operations can be performed until this message
has cleared.
❑ UPDATING CHANNELS XXX%
Displayed while the channel map is being updated.
Wait until the updating is complete.
❑ SIRIUS UPDATING
Displayed while the SiriusConnect receiver’s firmware is being updated.
❑ INVALID CHANNEL
Displayed if you select an unavailable channel.
❑ CALL SIRIUS
Displayed when you select a channel to which you
are not subscribed. Call SIRIUS if you want to subscribe.
❑ CHECK SIRIUS TUNER
Displayed if the SiriusConnect receiver is not connected. Make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is connected properly, and make sure its AC adapter is
plugged in.
77
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Using RDS (Australian models)
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available.
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator
appears.
RDS indicator
■ What is RDS?
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available in most European countries. Many FM stations use
it these days. In addition to displaying text information,
RDS can also help you find radio stations by type (e.g.,
news, sport, rock, etc.).
The AV controller supports four types of RDS information:
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Pressing the [Display] button will display the frequency for 3
seconds.
RT (Radio Text)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text will be shown on the display (see
page 79).
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type
(see page 79).
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 79).
Notes:
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV
controller may not be identical to those broadcast by
the radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be
displayed when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.
78
RDS Program Types (PTY)
Type
Display
None
None
News reports
News
Current affairs
Affairs
Information
Info
Sport
Sport
Education
Educate
Drama
Drama
Culture
Culture
Science and technology
Science
Varied
Varied
Pop music
Pop M
Rock music
Rock M
Middle of the road music
Easy M
Light classics
Light M
Serious classics
Classics
Other music
Other M
Weather
Weather
Finance
Finance
Children’s programmes
Children
Social affairs
Social
Religion
Religion
Phone in
Phone In
Travel
Travel
Leisure
Leisure
Jazz music
Jazz
Country music
Country
National music
Nation M
Oldies music
Oldies
Folk music
Folk M
Documentary
Document
Alarm test
TEST
Alarm
Alarm!
Listening to the Radio—Continued
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text information, the text can be displayed.
Displaying Radio Text (RT)
3
To start the search, press [Enter].
The AV controller searches until it finds
a station of the type you specified, at
which point it stops briefly before continuing with the search.
4
When a station you want to listen
to is found, press [Enter].
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
RT/PTY/TP
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
once.
The RT information scrolls across the
display.
Listening to Traffic News (TP)
Notes:
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV controller waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,
no RT information is available.
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
Preset e/r
RT/PTY/TP
Enter
You can search for radio stations by type.
1
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on
the display.
2
Use the Preset [e]/[r] buttons to
select the type of program you
want.
See the table on page 78.
RT/PTY/TP
Enter
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.
1
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
appear on the display, and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broadcast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.
2
To locate a station that is broadcasting TP, press [Enter].
The AV controller searches until it finds
a station that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
79
Universal Port Option UP-A1 Dock for iPod
About the UP-A1 Dock
With the UP-A1 Dock (sold separately), you can easily
play the music, photo, or movie stored on your Apple
iPod through the AV controller and enjoy great sound.
You can use the AV controller’s remote controller to
operate your iPod.
For the latest information on the Dock, see the Onkyo
Web site at: http://www.onkyo.com
iPod adapter
Dock connector
Compatible iPod models
For information about which iPod models are supported by the UP-A1 Dock, see the UP-A1 Dock
instruction manual.
Note:
Before using the UP-A1 Dock, update your iPod with the
latest software, available from the Apple Web site.
Function Overview
■ Basic Operation
Note:
The AV controller may take several seconds to startup,
so you might not hear the first few seconds of the first
song.
• Auto Power On Function
If you start iPod playback while the AV controller is
on Standby, the AV controller will automatically turn
on and select your iPod as the input source.
• Direct Change Function
If you start iPod playback while listening to another
input source, the AV controller will automatically
select your iPod as the input source.
• Using the AV controller’s Remote Controller
You can use the AV controller’s remote controller to
control basic iPod functions.
80
Operating Notes:
• Functionality depends on your iPod model and generation.
• Before selecting a different input source, stop iPod
playback to prevent the AV controller from selecting
the iPod input source by mistake.
• If any accessories are connected to your iPod, the AV
controller may not be able to select the input source
properly.
• While your iPod is in the UP-A1 Dock, its volume
control has no effect. If you adjust your iPod models
volume control while it’s in the UP-A1 Dock, make
sure it’s not set too high before you reconnect your
headphones.
• The Auto Power On function will not work if you set
your iPod in the UP-A1 Dock while it is playing.
• When Zone 2 or 3 is turned on, you can’t use Auto
Power On and Direct Change functions.
■ Using Your iPod models Alarm Clock
You can use your iPod models Alarm Clock function to
automatically turn on your iPod and the AV controller at
a specified time. The AV controller’s input source will
automatically be set to the [Port] selector.
Notes:
• To use this function, your iPod must be in the UP-A1
Dock, and the UP-A1 Dock must be connected to the
AV controller.
• When you use this function, be sure to set the AV controller’s volume control to a suitable level.
• The AV controller may take several seconds to startup,
so you might not hear the first few seconds of the first
song.
• When Zone 2 or 3 is turned on, you can’t use this function.
• You cannot use this function for sound effects on your
iPod.
■ Charging Your iPod models Battery
The UP-A1 Dock charges your iPod models battery
while your iPod is in the UP-A1 Dock and connected to
the UNIVERSAL PORT jacks on the AV controller.
While your iPod is seated in the UP-A1 Dock, its battery
will be charged when the AV controller is set to “On” or
“Standby”.
Note:
When UP-A1 Dock that seated iPod is connected, the
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
Universal Port Option UP-A1 Dock for iPod—Continued
a Arrow [q]/[w] and Enter buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
Controlling iPod
By pressing the Remote Mode button that’s been programmed with the remote control code for your Dock,
you can control your iPod in the Dock with the following
buttons.
The [Port] button is preprogrammed with the remote
control code for controlling a Dock with Universal Port
connector.
For details on entering a remote control code, see
page 142.
When Using a Dock with Universal Port connector:
• Connect the Dock to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack.
• See the Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
You can control your iPod when “Port” is selected as the
input source.
Press [Port] button first.
b Previous [7] button
Restarts the current song. Press it again to select the
previous song.
c Fast Reverse [5] button
Press and hold to fast reverse.
d Pause [3] button
Pauses playback. Press it again to start playback.
e Repeat button
Used with the repeat function.
f Display button
Select Standard or Extended mode*1.
g Muting button (62)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
h Album +/– button
Selects the next or previous album.
i VOL [q]/[w] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller.
f
j Playlist [e]/[r] buttons
Selects the previous or next playlist on the iPod.
k Return button
Exits the menu or returns to the previous menu.
g
h
i
a
j
b
k
l
m
c
d
n
o
e
p
Notes:
• With some iPod models and generations, certain buttons may not work as expected.
• For detailed operation of the iPod, please refer to the
instruction manual.
l Play [1] button
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically.
m Next [6] button
Selects the next song.
n Fast Forward [4] button
Press and hold to fast forward.
o Stop [2] button
Stops playback and displays a menu.
p Random button
Used with the shuffle function.
*1
Standard mode
Nothing is displayed on your TV and you navigate and
select your contents by using your iPod’s display.
Only this mode can playback the video.
Extended mode
Playlists (artists, albums, songs, and so on) are displayed
on your TV, and you can navigate and select your music
while looking at your TV.
Notes:
• In Extended mode, the playback will be continued
even if the AV controller is turned off.
• In Extended mode, you cannot operate your iPod
directly.
• In Extended mode, it may take some time to acquire
the contents.
• In Extended mode, video contents can not display on
your TV.
81
Universal Port Option UP-A1 Dock for iPod—Continued
Status messages
❏ PORT Reading
The AV controller is checking the connection with the
dock.
❏ PORT Not Support
The AV controller do not support the connected dock.
❏ PORT UP-A1
UP-A1 Dock is connected.
Notes:
• The AV controller displays the message “UP-A1” for
several seconds after recognizing the UP-A1.
• When the status message is not displayed on the AV
controller’s display, check the connection to your
iPod.
82
Recording
This section explains how to record the selected input
source to a component with recording capability, and
how to record audio and video from different sources.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to a digital input cannot be
recorded. Only analog inputs can be recorded.
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
Recording Separate AV Sources
Here you can record audio and video from completely
separate sources, allowing you to overdub audio onto
your video recordings. This function takes advantage of
the fact that when an audio-only input source (i.e., TV/
Tape, Tuner, CD or Phono) is selected, the video input
source remains unchanged.
In the following example, audio from the CD player connected to the CD IN, and video from the camcorder connected to the AUX1 Input Video jack are recorded by the
VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
AV Recording
Camcorder
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cassette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TV/TAPE OUT
jack. Video sources can be recorded to a video recorder
(e.g., VCR, DVD recorder) connected to the VCR/DVR
OUT jack. See pages 26 to 40 for hookup information.
1
Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
You can watch the source while recording. The AV controller’s Master Volume control has no effect on recording.
2
On your recorder, start recording.
3
On the source component, start
playback.
If you select another input source during recording, that input source will be
recorded.
video signal
audio signal
CD player
VCR
1
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
2
Prepare the VCR for recording.
3
Press the [AUX1] input selector button.
4
Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source, but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
5
Start recording on the VCR and start playback on the camcorder and CD player.
The video from the camcorder and the audio from
the CD player are recorded by the VCR.
83
Using the Listening Modes
Selecting Listening Modes
Selecting with the Remote Controller
See “About the Listening Modes” on page 92 for
detailed information about the listening modes.
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can
only be selected if your DVD player is connected to the AV controller with a digital audio
connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
• The listening modes you can select depend on
the format of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying Source Information” on
page 61.
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you
can only select the Mono, Direct, or Stereo listening mode.
Movie/TV
Music
THX
Game
Selecting on the AV controller
Remote
controller
Press the [Receiver] button, and
then press the Listening Mode
button repeatedly to select the
listening mode.
Listening Mode
■ Listening Mode buttons
■ Listening Mode buttons
[Movie/TV] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with movies and TV.
[Movie/TV] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with movies and TV.
[Music] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with music.
[Music] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with music.
[Game] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with video games.
[Game] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with video games.
[THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
84
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
The Speaker layout illustration
shows which speakers are set to
active in the “Speaker Configuration” setting (see page 98).
: Front left speaker
: Front wide left speaker
: Front high left speaker
: Center speaker
LW FL
C
FR RW
: Front high right speaker
: Front wide right speaker
SW
SW
: Front right speaker
: Surround right speaker
SL
SR
: Surround back right speaker
: Surround back left speaker
: Surround left speaker
SBL
SBR
: Subwoofer
C : active in the speaker settings
C : non-active in the speaker settings
LH
The Listening Mode button illustration shows that listening
modes can be selected.
FL
LW
LH
C
RH
RW
FR
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
RH
Mono/Multiplex Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
LW
Listening Mode
Button
FL
RH
C
FR
SW
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
Orchestra
✔
✔
Unplugged
✔
✔
Studio-Mix
✔
✔
TV Logic
✔
✔
Game-RPG
✔
✔
Game-Action
✔
✔
Game-Rock
✔
✔
Game-Sports
✔
✔
All Ch Stereo
✔
✔
✔
Full Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
RW
SW
Direct
T-D (TheaterDimensional)
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
Notes:
• Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192kHz.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
85
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Stereo Source (1/2)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
LW
Listening Mode
Button
FL
RH
C
FR
SW
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
Neural
Surround
Neural Digital
Music
PLII/PLIIx
Movie*1
THX Cinema
PLII/PLIIx Movie
Audyssey DSX*2
PLllz Height
THX Cinema
Neo:6 Cinema
THX Cinema
Neo:6 Cinema
Audyssey DSX*2
Neural THX
Cinema
PLII/PLIIx
Music*1
THX Music
PLII/PLIIx Music
Audyssey DSX*2
PLllz Height
THX Music
Neo:6 Music
THX Music
Neo:6 Music
Audyssey DSX*2
Neural Digital
Music
THX Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
RW
SW
✔
PLIIz Height
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
Direct
PLII/PLIIx
Movie*1
PLII/PLIIx
Music*1
PLII/PLIIx
Game*1
86
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
✔
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Stereo Source (2/2)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
LW
Listening Mode
Button
FL
RH
C
FR
SW
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LW
SW
SL
SBR
LH
RW
SBL
SBR
✔
RH
C
RW
SW
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Orchestra
✔
✔
Unplugged
✔
✔
Studio-Mix
✔
✔
TV Logic
✔
✔
Game-RPG
✔
✔
Game-Action
✔
✔
Game-Rock
✔
✔
Game-Sports
✔
✔
All Ch Stereo
✔
✔
✔
Full Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
T-D (TheaterDimensional)
FR
SW
SR
PLII/PLIIx
Game*1
THX Games
PLII/PLIIx Game
Audyssey DSX*2
PLllz Height
THX Games
Neural THX
Games
PLII Game THX
Ultra2 Games
PLIIz Height
THX Ultra2
Games
FL
✔
Notes:
*1 If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*2 This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Center speaker is connected to the power amplifier.
b. Either of Front High speakers or Front Wide speakers is connected to the power amplifier.
• Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192kHz.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
87
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
5.1 channel Sources (1/2)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
LW
Listening Mode
Button
FL
RH
C
FR
SW
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
DolbyDigital/
DolbyDigital
Plus/TrueHD/
Multichannel/
DTS/
PLIIx Movie
✔
PLIIx Music
✔
PLIIz Height
✔
DolbyEX
✔
DolbyEX
Audyssey DSX
✔
Neo:6
✔
Neo:6 Audyssey
DSX
✔
Neural Surround
✔
Audyssey DSX*2
✔
THX Cinema
✔
PLIIx Movie
THX Cinema
PLIIx Movie
Audyssey DSX
PLIIz Height
THX Cinema
Neo:6
THX Cinema
Neural THX
Cinema
THX Music
88
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
RW
SW
Direct
DTS 96/24*3/
DTS Express/
DTS-HD High
Resolution
Audio/DTS-HD
Master Audio/
DSD*1
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
✔
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
5.1 channel Sources (2/2)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
LW
Listening Mode
Button
FL
RH
C
FR
SW
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBL
SBR
RH
C
RW
SW
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
THX Games
PLIIx Height
THX Games
Neo:6 THX
Games
Neural THX
Games
THX Surround
EX
THX Ultra2
Cinema
PLIIz THX Ultra2
Cinema
THX Ultra2
Music
PLIIz THX Ultra2
Music
THX Ultra2
Games
PLIIz THX Ultra2
Games
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Orchestra
✔
✔
Unplugged
✔
✔
Studio-Mix
✔
✔
TV Logic
✔
✔
Game-RPG
✔
✔
Game-Action
✔
✔
Game-Rock
✔
✔
Game-Sports
✔
✔
All Ch Stereo
✔
✔
✔
Full Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
T-D (TheaterDimensional)
FR
SW
SR
PLIIx Music
THX Music
PLIIx Music
Audyssey DSX
PLIIz Height
THX Music
Neo:6 THX
Music
Neural THX
Music
FL
✔
89
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Notes:
*1 AV controller can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Setting the output setting on the player side to PCM might obtain a better sound
according to the player. In that case, set the output setting on the player side to PCM.
*2 This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Center speaker is connected to the power amplifier.
b. Either of Front High speakers or Front Wide speakers is connected to the power amplifier.
*3 Depending on the input source, DTS is used.
• Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192kHz.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
90
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
7.1 channel Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
LW
Listening Mode
Button
FL
RH
C
FR
SW
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
LH
RW
LW
SW
SL
SBR
RH
C
RW
SW
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*1
Multichannel/
DolbyDigital
Plus/TrueHD/
DTS-HD High
Resolution
Audio/DTS-HD
Master Audio/
DTS-ES
Discrete*3/
FR
SW
SR
SBL
FL
DTS-ES Matrix*3
PLIIz Height
✔
Audyssey DSX*2
✔
✔
THX Cinema
PLIIz Height
THX Cinema
✔
✔
✔
THX Music
PLIIz Height
THX Music
✔
✔
✔
THX Games
PLIIz Height
THX Games
✔
✔
Orchestra
✔
✔
Unplugged
✔
✔
Studio-Mix
✔
✔
TV Logic
✔
✔
Game-RPG
✔
✔
Game-Action
✔
✔
Game-Rock
✔
✔
Game-Sports
✔
✔
All Ch Stereo
✔
✔
✔
Full Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
T-D (TheaterDimensional)
✔
91
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Notes:
*1 Based on the audio channels contained in the source, the corresponding speakers will output the sound.
*2 This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Center speaker is connected to the power amplifier.
b. Either of Front High speakers or Front Wide speakers is connected to the power amplifier.
*3 If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
• Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192kHz.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
About the Listening Modes
The AV controller’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Direct
In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidelity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Stereo
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers and
subwoofer.
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
Multichannel
This mode is for use with PCM multichannel sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel source for
7.1-channel playback. It provides a very natural and
seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops
the listener. As well as music and movies, video games
can also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and
vivid imaging. If you’re not using any surround back
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used instead of
Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
92
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to more effectively use existing program material when height channel speaker outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height can be used to upmix a variety of sources from
movies and music, but are particularly well-suited to
upmix game content.
Dolby Digital
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo, and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™ is a scalable
system that adds new speakers to improve surround
impression. Starting with a 5.1 system Dynamic Surround Expansion first adds Wide channels for the biggest
impact on envelopment. Research in human hearing has
proven that information from the Wide channels is much
more critical in the presentation of a realistic soundstage
than then Back Surround channels found in traditional
7.1 systems. Dynamic Surround Expansion then creates
a pair of Height channels to reproduce the next most
important acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition to
these new Wide and Height channels, Dynamic Surround Expansion applies Surround Envelopment Processing to enhance the blend between the front and
surround channels.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
5.1-channel source + Dolby EX
These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1channel playback. They’re especially suited to Dolby EX
soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
Dolby Digital Plus
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest multichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz sampling rate.
Dolby TrueHD
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc formats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-channels with 192 kHz sampling rate.
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Music
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode
to expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Movie
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie mode
to expand 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
DTS
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for highfidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS 96/24
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
DTS-ES Discrete
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks,
which use a discrete surround back channel for true 6.1/
7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate audio
channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-degree
sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan across the
surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTSES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Discrete
soundtrack.
DTS Neo:6
This mode expands any 2-channel source for up to 7.1channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels
of matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing a very natural and seamless surround sound experience that fully envelops the listener.
• Neo:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
• Neo:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
5.1-channel source + Neo:6
This mode uses Neo:6 to expand 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest multichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz sampling rate.
DTS-HD Master Audio
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc formats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete channels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-channels
with 192 kHz sampling rate.
DTS Express
This format supports up to 5.1 channels and a lower sampling rate of 48 kHz. Applications include interactive
audio and commentary encoding for HD DVD Sub
Audio and Blu-ray Secondary Audio. Also broadcast
and media servers.
Neural Digital Music
Neural Digital Music is a new surround mode specifically designed to enhance the playback of compressed
digital music content. It provides listeners with an
expanded sound stage and clean surround experience,
even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and
Internet streams.
DSD
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with Super Audio CDs that feature multichannel audio.
DTS-ES Matrix
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks,
which use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTSES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix
soundtrack.
93
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
THX
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent standards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie theaters and home theaters just as the director intended.
THX Modes carefully optimize the tonal and spatial
characteristics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
home-theater environment. They can be used with 2channel matrixed and multichannel sources.
Surround back speaker output depends on the source
material and the selected listening mode.
• THX Cinema
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical soundtracks
for playback in a home theater environment. In this
mode, THX Loudness Plus is configured for cinema
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive
Decorrelation are active.
• THX Music
THX Music mode is tailored for listening to music,
which is typically mastered at significantly higher
levels than movies. In this mode, THX Loudness
Plus is configured for music playback and only Timbre Matching is active.
• THX Games
THX Games mode is meant for spatially accurate
playback of game audio, which is often mixed similarly to movies but in a smaller environment. THX
Loudness Plus is configured for game audio levels,
with Timbre Matching active.
• THX Ultra2 Cinema
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1channel playback. It does this by analyzing the composition of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the surround back channel output.
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image, and simulates the natural reverberation of
a large hall.
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acoustic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows produced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
Game-RPG
Use this mode when playing role playing game discs.
Game-Action
Use this mode when playing action game discs.
Game-Rock
Use this mode when playing rock game discs.
Game-Sports
Use this mode when playing sports game discs.
• THX Ultra2 Music
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire listening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
• THX Ultra2 Games
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel
playback.
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
• THX Surround EX
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint development between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual surround sound
even with only two or three speakers. This works by controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
Neural Surround
Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency
domain processing, which allows delivery of a more
detailed sound stage, with superior channel separation
and localization of audio elements. The Neural Surround
modes can expand any 2-channel stereo source for 5.1or 7.1-channel playback, respectively. Use them with
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel
94
stereo sources, including video games. Neural Surround
can also be used by broadcasters to encode and transmit
surround-sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo.
Advanced Setup
Onscreen Setup Menus
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a convenient way to change the AV controller’s
various settings. Settings are organized into nine categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.
Main menu
Submenus
pages 96–97
1. Input/Output Assign
Menu
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
Monitor Out
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Analog Audio Input
Gamma Curve
page 50 page 49 page 48
page 47 page 45
pages 98–101
2. Speaker Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
pages 112–113
6. Miscellaneous
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Volume Setup
OSD Setup
12V Trigger A Setup
12V Trigger B Setup
12V Trigger C Setup
Speaker Settings
Speaker Configuration
Speaker Distance
Level Calibration
Equalizer Settings
THX Audio Setup
page 51
pages 102–105
3. Audio Adjust
page 138
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
pages 113–117
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
Multiplex/Mono
Dolby
DTS
Audyssey
Theater-Dimensional
LFE Level
Direct
page 135
pages 106–110
4. Source Setup
page 128
page 52
1.
2.
3.
4.
DVD/BD
IntelliVolume
A/V Sync
Name Edit
Picture Adjust
8. Remote Controller Setup
1. Remote Mode Setup
2. Activities Setup
page 111
5. Listening Mode Preset
page 151
page 140
page 118
9. Lock Setup
Lock
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
AUX1
Unlocked
95
Advanced Setup—Continued
Input/Output Assign
This section explains items on the “Input/Output Assign” menu.
1
2
3
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “1. Input/Output Assign”, and then
press [Enter].
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the submenu, and then press
[Enter].
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select setting, and then use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to set them.
5
When you’ve finished, press the [Setup]
button.
The setup menu closes.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
Monitor Out
Monitor Out
Resolution
See “Monitor Out Setup” on page 45.
Brightness
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Contrast
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Hue
–20 to +20 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance. “–20” is the strongest green. “+20” is the strongest red.
Saturation
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust saturation. “–50” is the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
Red Brightness
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture red brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Red Contrast
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust red contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Green Brightness
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture green brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Green Contrast
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust green contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Blue Brightness
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Blue Contrast
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust blue contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
HDMI Input
See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 47.
96
Advanced Setup—Continued
Component Video Input
See “Component Video Input Setup” on page 48.
Digital Audio Input
See “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 49.
Analog Audio Input
Multich
See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 50.
Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
0 dB (default), 5 dB, 10 dB, 15 dB
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV controller’s subwoofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note
that this setting only affects signals connected to the AV controller’s MULTI CH: SUBWOOFER jack.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB or 15 dB setting.
Balance
See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 50.
Input Channel
See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 50.
Gamma Curve
The color range and the brightness characteristic of a reproduced image depend on the TV or projector. With this
setting, you can adjust the balance of the color signals (R, G, and B).
To view the TV picture while setting, press the [Enter] button. To return to the default, press the [CLR] button. The
“Gamma Curve” setting is set respectively of HDMI main, HDMI sub, and analog.
Red Gamma 0 to Red Gamma 9
Green Gamma 0 to Green Gamma 9
Blue Gamma 0 to Blue Gamma 9
The following graph shows the default settings.
Output
224
192
160
128
96
80
64
48
32
Gamma9
Gamma8
Gamma7
Gamma6
Gamma2
Gamma3
Gamma4
Gamma5
Gamma1
Gamma0
24
Input
97
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Setup
Some of the settings in this section are set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker
Setup (see page 54).
Here you can check the settings made by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup, or set them
manually, which is useful if you change one of the connected speakers after using Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup.
Note:
The Speaker Setup cannot be carried out while headphones are connected to the AV controller.
1
2
3
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “2. Speaker Setup”, and then press
[Enter].
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the submenu, and then press
[Enter].
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select setting, and then use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to set them.
5
When you’ve finished, press the [Setup]
button.
The setup menu closes.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
Speaker Settings
See “Speaker Settings” on page 51.
Speaker Configuration
With these settings, you can specify which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker. Specify
“Full Band” for speakers that can output low frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers with a good
sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover frequency will be
output by the subwoofer instead of the speaker. Refer to your speaker’s manuals to determine the optimum crossover
frequencies.
If you set up your speakers using Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup, please make sure
manually that any THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.
Subwoofer
1ch: Audio signal is outputted from SW1 jack only.
2ch: Audio signal is outputted from SW1 and SW2 jacks (default).
No: Select if no subwoofer is connected.
Front*1
Full Band, 40Hz, 45Hz, 50Hz, 55Hz, 60Hz, 70Hz, 80Hz(THX) (default), 90Hz,
100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 130Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
Center*2
Full Band, 40Hz, 45Hz, 50Hz, 55Hz, 60Hz, 70Hz, 80Hz(THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 130Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
None: Select if no speaker is connected.
Surround*2
Front Wide*2*3
Front High*2*3
Surr Back*3*4*5
Surr Back Ch*6
98
1ch: Select if only one surround back L speaker is connected.
2ch: Select if two (left and right) surround back speakers are connected (default).
Advanced Setup—Continued
LPF of LFE (Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)
80Hz(THX) (default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz
This setting is not set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see
page 54).
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can
be used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to sources that use the LFE channel.
*
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “80Hz(THX)”.
DoubleBass*7
On: Double Bass function on (default).
Off (THX): Double Bass function off.
This setting is not set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see
page 54).
With the Double Bass function, you can boost bass output by feeding bass sounds from the front left and right,
center channels to the subwoofer.
*
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.
Notes:
The “Front Wide” and “Front High” settings are cannot be set at the same time.
*1 If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting is fixed at “Full Band”.
*2 If the “Front” setting is set to anything other than “Full Band”, “Full Band” cannot be selected here.
*3 If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot be selected.
*4 If the “Surround” setting is set to anything other than “Full Band”, “Full Band” cannot be selected here.
*5 If the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” (page 51), this setting cannot be selected.
*6 If the “Surr Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot be selected.
*7 This function can be set only if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “1ch” or “2ch”, and the “Front” setting is set to “Full Band”.
Speaker Distance
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see page 54).
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the listening position so that the sound from each speaker
arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound designer intended.
Unit
feet: Distances can be set in feet. Range: 0.2 to 30 feet in 0.2-foot steps.
(North American models: default)
meters: Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.06 to 9 meters in 0.06-meter steps.
(Australian models: default)
Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center, Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right, Surr Right,
Surr Back Right, Surr Back Left, Surr Left, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2*1
Specify the distance from the each speaker to your listening position.
Note:
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” (see page 98).
*1 If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “1ch”, this setting cannot be selected.
99
Advanced Setup—Continued
Level Calibration
Level Calibration can be set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see
page 54).
If you prefer, you can adjust the level of each speaker with the built-in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is
the same at the listening position.
Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center, Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right, Surr Right,
Surr Back Right, Surr Back Left, Surr Left, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2*1
The levels can be adjusted from –12.0 to +12.0 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15.0 to +12.0 dB for the subwoofer).
Notes:
• The speakers cannot be calibrated while the output of the AV controller is muted.
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you
normally listen at volume settings below this, be careful because the test tone will be much louder.
• You cannot get the test tone from speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration”
(see page 98).
*1 If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “1ch”, this setting cannot be selected.
Tip:
If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level of each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening
position, measured with C-weighting and slow reading.
Equalizer Settings
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see page 54).
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of speakers individually with a 15-band equalizer. The volume of
each speaker can be set on this page.
Notes:
• You can select: “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”, “100Hz”, “160Hz”, “250Hz”, “400Hz”, “630Hz”, “1000Hz”, “1600Hz”,
“2500Hz”, “4000Hz”, “6300Hz”, “10000Hz” or “16000Hz”. And for the subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”,
“100Hz”, or “160Hz”.
• While the Direct listening mode is selected, the equalizer settings have no effect.
Equalizer
Manual: You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker manually. If you selected “Manual”,
continue with this procedure.
1
Press the Down [w] button to select “Channel”, and then use the
Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select a speaker.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select a frequency, and
then use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to adjust the level at
that frequency.
The volume at each frequency can be adjusted from –6 to +6 dB in 1 dB
steps.
Tip:
Low frequencies (e.g., 63Hz) affect bass sounds; high frequencies (e.g.,
16000Hz) affect treble sounds.
3
Use the Up [q] button to select “Channel”, and then use the Left
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select another speaker.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker
Configuration” (page 98).
Audyssey: The tone for each speaker is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room
Correction and Speaker Setup. Be sure to select this setting after having performed
Room Correction and Speaker Setup. “Audyssey” is automatically selected when
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are set to “On” (see page 104). When
“Audyssey” is selected, “Dolby Volume” becomes “Off” automatically
(see page 120).
Off: Tone off, response flat (default).
100
Advanced Setup—Continued
THX Audio Setup
This setting is not set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see page 54).
With the “SurrBack Sp Spacing” setting, you can specify the distance between your surround back speakers.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the “THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer” setting to “Yes”. You can then
apply THX’s Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for
listeners sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
You can also set the THX Loudness Plus. When the “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”, it is possible to enjoy even subtle
nuances of audio expression at low volume.
This result is only available when the THX listening mode is selected.
SurrBack Sp Spacing
< 1ft (< 0.3m):
Select this if your surround back speakers are between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
1 ft – 4 ft (0.3 m – 1.2 m):
Select this if your surround back speakers are between 1 and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
> 4ft (> 1.2m) (default):
Select this if your surround back speakers are more than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart.
Note:
Cannot be set if “Surr Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (see page 98) or “Surr Back” is set to “None” (see page 98).
THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer
No: Select this if you do not have a THX-certified subwoofer.
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-certified subwoofer.
Note:
If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be selected (see page 98).
BGC
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
Note:
This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
Loudness Plus
Off: Select this to turn off Loudness Plus.
On: Select this to turn on Loudness Plus (default).
Preserve THX Settings
Yes: Audyssey Dynamic EQ™/Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ will not be active in
THX listening mode.
No: Audyssey Dynamic EQ/Audyssey Dynamic Volume will be active in THX listening mode depending on the setting.
Note:
This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”.
THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™
Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a
surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain
sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal
and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels
and frequency response. This enables users experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode. The new THX
Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for
each type of content.
101
Advanced Setup—Continued
Audio Adjust
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
1
2
3
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “3. Audio Adjust”, and then press
[Enter].
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the submenu, and then press
[Enter].
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select setting, and then use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to set them.
5
When you’ve finished, press the [Setup]
button.
The setup menu closes.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
Multiplex/Mono
Multiplex
Input Channel
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are output.
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV broadcasts, and so on.
Mono
Input Channel
Left + Right: Both the left and right channels are output (default).
Left: Only the left channel is output.
Right: Only the right channel is output.
This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or
2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening mode.
Output Speaker
Center: Mono audio is output by the center speaker (default).
Left / Right: Mono audio is output by the front left and right speakers.
This setting determines which speakers output mono audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
Note:
If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (page 98), this setting is fixed at “Left / Right”.
Dolby
PLIIx Music (2ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, instead of Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
Panorama
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music listening mode.
Dimension
–3 to +3 (default: 0)
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. Higher settings move the sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much surround sound, move the sound field forward to improve
the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround sound, move
it backward.
102
Advanced Setup—Continued
Center Width
0 to 7 (default: 3)
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a center speaker, the center channel sound is output by only
the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to the front
left and right speakers to create a phantom center). This setting controls the front left, right, and center mix,
allowing you to adjust the weight of the center channel sound.
PLIIz Height Gain
Low: Low PLIIz Height Gain becomes active.
Mid: Medium PLIIz Height Gain becomes active (default).
High: High PLIIz Height Gain becomes active.
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz enables the listener to select how much gain is applied to the
front high speakers. There are three settings, “Low”, “Mid” and “High”, and the front high speakers are accentuated in that order. While “Mid” is the default listening setting, the listener may adjust the Height Gain Control
to their personal preference.
Dolby EX
Auto: If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the Dolby EX or THX
Surround EX listening mode is used.
Manual: You can select any available listening mode (default).
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals are handled. This setting is unavailable if no surround
back speaker is connected. This setting is effective with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD
only.
Note:
If the “Front High” and “Front Wide” settings are set to other than “None” (page 98), this setting is fixed at
“Manual”.
Dolby Volume
Off: Dolby Volume off (default).
Low: Low Compression Mode becomes active.
Mid: Medium Compression Mode becomes active.
High: High Compression Mode becomes active. This setting affects volume the
most, causing all sounds to be of equal loudness.
Dolby Volume is an intelligent volume control system that resolves and improves audio frequency response and
volume inconsistencies in playback applications.
Notes:
• When the “Dolby Volume” is set to effective, “Equalizer” setting is set to “Off” or “Manual”, and “Dynamic
EQ” is set to “Off”.
• When the “Dolby Volume” is set to effective, the Late Night function cannot be set.
Half Mode
Off: Half Mode off.
On: Half Mode on (default).
The Half Mode parameter turns Dolby Volume Half Mode processing ON and OFF.
In OFF mode, Dolby Volume applies a bass and treble attenuation to the audio when the system gain exceeds
reference level. This enables a more perceptually flat listening experience as human ears are more sensitive to
bass and treble at higher levels. Some listeners however, prefer to have more bass and treble performance at
higher gain levels.
Notes:
• If the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot be selected.
• During Half Mode ON playback, Dolby Volume does not apply a bass and treble attenuation when the system
volume exceeds reference level thereby boosting perception of high and low frequencies.
DTS
Neo:6 Music
Center Image
0 to 5 (default: 2)
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With
this setting, you can specify by how much the front left and right channel output is attenuated in order to create
the center channel.
Setting a value “0” in the middle is set to hear a sound. Sound is spread in left and right (the outside) so that the
set value is made big. Please adjust by liking.
103
Advanced Setup—Continued
Audyssey
For “Dynamic EQ”, “Reference Level” and “Dynamic Volume”, you cannot change the settings before completing
Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup.
Dynamic EQ
Off: Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ off (default).
On: Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ on.
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ™, you can enjoy great sound even when listening at low volume levels.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into
account human perception and room acoustics. It does so by selecting the correct frequency response and
surround volume levels moment-by-moment so that the content sounds the way it was created at any volume
level—not just at reference level.
Reference Level
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film reference. To achieve the same reference level in a home theater
system each speaker level must be adjusted so that –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to 2000 Hz) pink noise
produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening position. A home theater system automatically calibrated
by Audyssey MultEQ® will play at reference level when the master volume control is set to the 0 dB position.
At that level you can hear the mix as the mixers heard it.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the
reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film
reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. The Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix
level of the content is not within the standard.
Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
0 dB: This is the default setting and should be used when listening to movies.
5 dB: Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as
classical music.
10 dB: Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This
setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB
below film reference.
15 dB: Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed
at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.
Note:
If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot be selected.
Dynamic Volume (see page 54)
Off:
Light:
Medium:
Heavy:
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ off (default).
Light Compression Mode becomes active.
Medium Compression Mode becomes active.
Heavy Compression Mode becomes active. This setting affects volume the
most, causing all sounds to be of equal loudness.
Note:
After Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed, even if “Equalizer” setting is
not set to “Audyssey”, when “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “On”, “Equalizer” settings is set to “Audyssey”.
When “Dynamic Volume” is set to effective, “Equalizer” setting is set to “Audyssey” and “Dynamic EQ” is set
to “On”. When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” becomes “Off” automatically.
Soundstage
–3dB, –2dB, –1dB, Reference (default), +1dB, +2dB, +3dB
Adjusts the soundstage when using Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™.
Note:
If the “Center” setting is set to “None”, or both “Front High” and “Front Wide” settings are set to “None”
(page 98), this setting cannot be selected.
104
Advanced Setup—Continued
Theater-Dimensional
Listening Angle
Wide: Select if the listening angle is greater than 30 degrees (default).
Narrow: Select if the listening angle is less than 30 degrees.
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
Listening angle: 30°
LFE Level
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby Digital,
DTS, multichannel PCM, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and DSD sources.
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB or
–Q dB.
Dolby Digital*1, DTS*2, Multich PCM*3, Dolby TrueHD*4, DTS-HD Master Audio*5, DSD*6
The level can be set to –Q dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
Notes:
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources.
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources.
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD sources.
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master Audio sources.
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD (Super Audio CD) sources.
Direct
Analog
Subwoofer
This setting determines whether or not analog audio signals (bass signals) are output from front speakers when
the Direct listening mode is selected.
Off: Analog audio signals (bass signals) are not output (default).
On: Analog audio signals (bass signals) are output.
DSD
DAC Direct
This setting determines whether or not DSD (Super Audio CD) audio signals are passed through the DSP
processing when the Direct listening mode is selected.
Off: DSD signals are processed by the DSP (default).
On: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Note:
Once you have selected “Yes”, only DAC Direct will be available for selection. “DSD Direct” will appear on
the display.
105
Advanced Setup—Continued
Source Setup
This section explains items on the “Source Setup” menu. Items can be set individually for each input selector.
1
Press the input selector buttons to select
an input source.
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and then press [Enter].
2
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
5
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
change it.
The “Source Setup” menu items are explained
below.
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “4. Source Setup”, and then press
[Enter].
The “Source Setup” menu appears. The name of
the currently selected input selector is displayed.
6
When you’ve finished, press the [Setup]
button.
The setup menu closes.
Input selector
4. Source Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its input selector buttons, [Setup] button,
arrow buttons, and [Enter] button.
DVD/BD
IntelliVolume
A/V Sync
Name Edit
Picture Adjust
For NET/USB input source only “IntelliVolume”
will be available.
IntelliVolume
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each input selector individually. This is useful if one of your source
components is louder or quieter than the others.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use the Left [e] button to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably
quieter, use the Right [r] button to increase its input level.
IntelliVolume
–12 dB to +12 dB (default: 0 dB)
A/V Sync
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning function, you may find that the picture and sound are out of
sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this by applying a delay to the audio signal.
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press [Enter]. To return to the previous screen, press the [Return]
button.
A/V Sync
0 ms to 250 ms in 2 ms steps (default: 0 ms)
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 115), and your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed
delay time will be the summation of the A/V Sync delay time and the HDMI Lip Sync delay time. The HDMI
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.
Note:
A/V Sync is disabled when the Direct listening mode is used with an analog input source.
106
Advanced Setup—Continued
Name Edit
You can enter a custom name for each individual input selector (excluding Tuner) and radio preset for easy identification. When entered, the custom name will appear on the display.
Notes:
• To name a radio preset, use the [Tuner] button to select AM or FM, and then select the preset (see page 66).
• (North American models) You cannot enter a custom name for SIRIUS radio presets.
• To restore a custom name to the default, erase the custom name by entering an empty white space for each letter.
1
Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select a character, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
2
When you’ve finished, to store a name, be sure to use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to
select “OK”, and then press [Enter].
Otherwise it will not be saved.
Name input area
DVD/BD
4 - 3. Name Edit
Name
A
N
a
n
B
O
b
o
C
P
c
p
D
Q
d
q
E
R
e
r
F
S
f
s
G
T
g
t
H
U
h
u
I
V
i
v
J
W
j
w
K
X
k
x
1
!
{
[
2
@
}
]
3
#
|
4
$
:
5
%
6
^
<
7
&
>
8
9
(
;
0
)
’
–
_
,
Space
?
Back Space
L
Y
l
y
M
Z
m
z
.
`
~
/
OK
(Left)/ (Right):
Selected when the cursor is moved within the
Name input area.
Back Space:
“Back Space” deletes one character to the left of
the cursor.
OK:
Selects when the entry is complete.
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select “ ”(Left) or “ ”(Right) and then press [Enter].
2. Press [Enter] several times to select the incorrect character (The cursor moves one letter each time [Enter]
is pressed).
3. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select the correct character, and then press [Enter].
Picture Adjust
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture quality and reduce any noise appearing on the screen.
To view the TV picture while setting, press [Enter]. To return to the previous screen, press the [Return] button.
“Picture Adjust” is not operable when the input selector is set to “NET/USB”.
Tip:
The “Picture Adjust” menus (excluding “Red Brightness” to “Blue Contrast”) can also be set using the [Video] button
on the remote controller.
1. Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Video] button.
2. Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select item, and then use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to change
the setting.
Game Mode
Off: Game Mode off (default).
On: Game Mode on.
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video component (i.e. game console), select the corresponding input source and set the “Game Mode” setting to “On”. The delay will decrease but in return the picture
quality will become poor.
107
Advanced Setup—Continued
Zoom Mode
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
Normal:
Full: (default)
Zoom:
Wide Zoom:
108
Advanced Setup—Continued
ISF Mode
Custom: User setting (All items can be freely set.)
Day: Setting when a room is bright.
Night: Setting when a room is dark.
The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup and calibration standards established by the Imaging Science Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed carefully crafted, industry-recognized standards for optimal
video performance and has implemented a training program for technicians and installers to use these standards
to obtain optimal picture quality from the receiver. Accordingly, Onkyo recommends that setup and calibration
be performed by an ISF Certified installation technician.
Picture Mode*1*2
Auto: The type of content is detected automatically and processed accordingly
(default).
Video: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc whose content originates from video.
Film: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc whose content originates from film.
DVD-Video disc content originates from either film (recorded at 24 frames per second) or video intended for
TV (recorded at 30 frames per second). With the default Picture Mode setting of Auto, the AV controller
automatically detects the type of content and processes it accordingly to achieve the best picture quality. If the
AV controller detects the type of content incorrectly due to characteristics of the disc, you can select Video or
Film manually.
Edge Enhancement*2
Off:
Low:
Mid:
High:
Edge enhancement off (default).
Low edge enhancement.
Medium edge enhancement.
High edge enhancement.
With Edge Enhancement, you can make the picture appear sharper.
Mosquito NR*1*2
Off:
Low:
Mid:
High:
Mosquito noise reduction off (default).
Low mosquito noise reduction.
Medium mosquito noise reduction.
High mosquito noise reduction.
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG content.
Random NR*1*2
Off:
Low:
Mid:
High:
Random noise reduction off (default).
Low random noise reduction.
Medium random noise reduction.
High random noise reduction.
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove indiscriminate picture noise, such as film grain.
Block NR*1*2
Off: Block noise reduction off (default).
On: Block noise reduction on.
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG content.
Notes:
*1 When the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On”, this setting cannot be selected.
*2 When the “ISF Mode” setting is set to “Day” or “Night”, this setting cannot be selected.
109
Advanced Setup—Continued
Resolution*2
Through: Select this to pass video through the AV controller at the same resolution
and with no conversion (default).
Auto: Select this to have the AV controller automatically convert video at
resolutions not supported by your TV. When the “Monitor Out” is set to
“Analog”, this setting will be changed to “Through”.
480p (480/576p):
Select this for 480p or 576p output and video conversion as necessary.
720p: Select this for 720p output and video conversion as necessary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output and video conversion as necessary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output and video conversion as necessary. When
the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”, this setting will be changed to
“1080i”.
1080p/24: Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second and video
conversion as necessary. When the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”,
this setting will be changed to “1080i”.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI outputs and have the AV controller upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
Available only when “Source” has been selected in the “Resolution” of the “Monitor Out” setting (page 46).
Brightness*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Contrast*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Hue*2
–20 to +20 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance. “–20” is the strongest green. “+20” is the strongest red.
Saturation*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust saturation. “–50” is the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
Gamma*2
–3 to +3 (default: 0)
Adjust the balance of color data signal R (red), G (green), and B (blue) of incoming picture.
Red Brightness*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture red brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Red Contrast*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust red contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Green Brightness*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture green brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Green Contrast*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust green contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Blue Brightness*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Blue Contrast*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust blue contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Note:
*2 When the “ISF Mode” setting is set to “Day” or “Night”, this setting cannot be selected.
110
Advanced Setup—Continued
Assigning Listening Modes to Input Sources
You can assign a default listening mode to each input source that will be selected automatically when you select each
input source. For example, you can set the default listening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals. You can
select other listening modes during playback, but the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV controller has
been set to Standby.
1
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “5. Listening Mode Preset”, and
then press [Enter].
The “Listening Mode Preset” menu appears.
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the input source that you want to
set, and then press [Enter].
The signal format selection menu appears.
5–1. Listening Mode Preset
Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
D.F. 2ch
D.F. Mono
DVD/BD
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the signal format that you want to
set, and then use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select a listening mode.
5
When you’ve finished, press the [Setup]
button.
The setup menu closes.
Notes:
• If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1
Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT
jack, you can assign only “Analog” to Port input
source.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and
[Enter] button.
AllChSt
PLllxMovie
Neo:6
PLllxMovie
FullMono
For Tuner input source only “Analog” will be
available. For NET/USB input source only “Digital” will be available.
Listening Mode Preset
Analog/PCM: With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when an analog (CD, TV, LD,
VHS, MD, turntable, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or PCM digital (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is
played.
Dolby Digital: With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a Dolby Digital or Dolby
Digital Plus format digital audio signal is played (DVD, etc.).
DTS: With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution
format digital audio signal is played (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).104
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources in a digital format, such as
Dolby Digital or DTS.
D.F. Mono: With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a mono digital audio signal
is played (DVD, etc.).
Multich PCM: Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel PCM sources input via a HDMI IN, such
as DVD-Audio.
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-HD Master Audio sources, such as Bluray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
DSD: Specifies the default listening mode for DSD multichannel sources, such as Super Audio CD.
Only listening modes that can be used with each input signal format can be selected (see pages 85 to 91).
The Last Valid option means that the listening mode selected last will be used.
111
Advanced Setup—Continued
Miscellaneous (Volume/OSD) Setup
This section explains the items on the “Miscellaneous” menu.
1
2
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “6. Miscellaneous”, and then press
[Enter].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
6. Miscellaneous
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Volume Setup
OSD Setup
12V Trigger A Setup
12V Trigger B Setup
12V Trigger C Setup
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and then press [Enter].
The screen for that item appears.
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.
5
When you’ve finished, press the [Setup]
button.
The setup menu closes.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
Volume Setup
Volume Display
Absolute: Display range is “Min”, 0.5 through 99.5, “Max”.
Relative: Display range is –Q dB, –81.5 dB through +18.0 dB.
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level is displayed.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value 0 dB.
Muting Level
–Q dB (fully muted), –50 dB to –10 dB in 10 dB steps
This setting determines how much the output is muted when the muting function is used (page 62).
Maximum Volume
Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)
Off, –32 dB to +17 dB (Relative display)
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
To disable this setting, select “Off”.
Power On Volume
Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)
Last, –Q dB, –81 dB to +18 dB (Relative display)
With this preference, you can specify the volume setting to be used each time the AV controller is turned on.
To use the same volume level that was used when the AV controller was turned off, select “Last”.
The “Power On Volume” cannot be set higher than the “Maximum Volume” setting.
Headphone Level
–12 dB to +12 dB
With this preference, you can specify the headphone volume relative to the main volume. This is useful if
there’s a volume difference between your speakers and your headphones.
112
Advanced Setup—Continued
OSD Setup
Immediate Display
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
This preference determines whether operation details are displayed onscreen when an AV controller function
is adjusted.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not be output if the input source is connected to an HDMI
IN.
Display Position
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).
Top: Top of the screen.
This preference determines where on the screen operation details are displayed.
TV Format (Australian models)
See “TV Format Setup (Australian models)” on page 52.
Language
See “Selecting the Language used for the onscreen setup menus” on page 43.
12V Trigger A/B/C Setup
See “Using the 12V Triggers” on page 138.
.
Hardware Setup
This section explains items on the “Hardware Setup” menu.
1
2
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “7. Hardware Setup”, and then
press [Enter].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and then press [Enter].
The screen for that item appears.
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.
5
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
113
Advanced Setup—Continued
Remote ID
Remote ID
1, 2, 3
When several Integra/Onkyo components are used in the same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To
differentiate the AV controller from the other components, you can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to
2 or 3.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
1
While holding down the [Receiver] button, press and hold down the [Setup] button until
the Receiver button lights up (about 3 seconds).
2
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Receiver button flashes twice.
Note:
If you do change the AV controller’s remote ID, be sure to change the remote controller to the same ID, otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with the remote controller.
Multi Zone
See “Setting the Multi Zone” on page 135.
Tuner
FM/AM Frequency Step (North American models)
AM Frequency Step (Australian models)
See “FM/AM Frequency Step Setup” on page 52.
SAT Radio Mode (North American models)
If you connect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio antenna to the AV controller (sold separately), set this setting to “SIRIUS”. See “Setting the Satellite Radio Mode” on page 68.
Antenna Aiming (North American models)
The ID of the Sirius Connect Home Tuner is displayed here. You must sign up to obtain a SIRIUS ID.
See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home Antenna” on page 76.
SIRIUS Parental Lock (North American models)
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not available if “SAT Radio Mode” is set to “None”.
See “SIRIUS Parental Lock” on page 72.
114
Advanced Setup—Continued
HDMI
Audio TV Out
Off: HDMI audio is not output to TV (default).
On: HDMI audio is output to TV and the sound will be heard from the TV
speakers.
This preference determines whether audio received at the HDMI input is output from the HDMI outputs. You
may want to turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the HDMI output and you want to listen to the
audio from a component that’s connected to an HDMI input, through your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should
be set to “Off”.
Notes:
• If “On” is selected and the signal can be output by the TV, the AV controller will output no sound through its
speakers.
• If “On” is selected, “TV Speaker On” appears on the Display by pressing the [Display] button.
• When “TV Control” is set to “On”, this setting is fixed at “Auto”.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output even when this setting is set to “On”. When you
try to get audio from your TV, signals from the source component may be converted to the format supported
by your TV.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” or “TV Control” is set to “On” to hear from speakers of
-compatible TV (page 25), by controlling the AV controller’s volume, the AV controller’s speakers
will produce sound while the TV’s speakers are muted. If your TV is not compatible with
, the
volume level will not change. To stop the AV controller’s speakers producing sound, change the settings,
change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV controller’s volume.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”, the remote controller’s [Audio] button is disabled.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both (Main)” or “Both (Sub)” (page 45) and if your TV connected to
a priority output cannot output the audio, the sound will be heard from AV controller’s speakers.
Lip Sync
Disable: HDMI Lip Sync disabled (default).
Enable: HDMI Lip Sync enabled.
The AV controller can be set to automatically correct any delay between the video and the audio, based on the
data from the connected monitor.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
(see page 106).
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “HDMI Main”, “Both (Main)” or “Both” (page 45), the delay will be
corrected in accordance with the monitor connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. On the other hand, if “HDMI
Sub” or “Both (Sub)” is selected, the delay will be corrected in accordance with the monitor connected to
HDMI OUT SUB.
x.v.Color
Disable: “x.v.Color” disabled (default).
Enable: “x.v.Color” enabled.
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both support the “x.v.Color”, you can enable “x.v.Color” on
the AV controller with this setting.
Notes:
• If the color is unnatural when “x.v.Color” is set to “Enable”, change the setting to “Disable”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both (Main)” or “Both (Sub)” (page 45) and if your TV connected to
a priority output does not support x.v.Color, output will be without x.v.Color control.
115
Advanced Setup—Continued
HDMI Control (RIHD)
This function allows
controller.
On:
Off:
enabled.
disabled (default).
-compatible components connected via HDMI to be controlled with the AV
Notes:
•
, which stands for Remote Interactive over HDMI, is the name of the system control function found
on Integra/Onkyo components. The AV controller can be used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control),
which allows system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability
between various components, however, operation with components other than
-compatible components cannot be guaranteed.
When set to “On” and close the menu, the name of connected
-compatible components and
“RIHD On” are displayed on the AV controller.
“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”
When the AV controller cannot receive the name of the component, it is displayed as “Player*” or
“Recorder*”, etc (“*” means the number of two or more component).
When set to “Off” and close the menu, “RIHD Off” are displayed on the AV controller.
“Disconnect” → “RIHD Off”
• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment
is compatible or not.
• Set it to “Off” if the operation is not successful.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details.
• The
control does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use HDMI OUT MAIN instead.
Power Control
On: Power Control enabled.
Off: Power Control disabled.
To link the power functions of
-compatible components connected via HDMI, select “On”.
This setting is set to “On” automatically when the above “HDMI Control (RIHD)” is set to “On” for the first
time.
Notes:
• The “Power Control” setting can be set only when the above “HDMI Control (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”.
• HDMI power control only works with
-compatible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings or compatibility.
• When set to “On”, the power consumption on standby mode increases.
• When set to “On”, regardless of whether the AV controller is On or on Standby, both audio and video received
by an HDMI input will be output from the HDMI output for playback on the TV or other component that’s
connected to the HDMI output.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details.
TV Control
On: TV Control enabled.
Off: TV Control disabled.
Set to “On” when you want to control the AV controller from an
HDMI.
-compatible TV that is connected to
Notes:
• Do not assign the component connected with the HDMI input to the TV/Tape selector when you set “TV
Control” setting to “On”. Otherwise, appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation is not guaranteed.
• Set to “Off” when the TV is not compatible or when it is unclear whether the TV is compatible or not.
• The “TV Control” setting can be set only when the above “HDMI Control (RIHD)” and “Power Control”
settings are both set to “On”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details.
Note:
After changing the settings of the “HDMI Control (RIHD)”, “Power Control”, or “TV Control”, set all connected
pieces of equipment to Standby and then turn them on again. Refer to the User’s Manuals for all connected
pieces of equipment.
116
Advanced Setup—Continued
Network
See “Network Settings” on page 128.
Firmware Update
Notes:
• Perform the firmware update only when an announcement is posted on the Integra Web site.
• It takes about 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• When updating a firmware from a USB mass storage device, the AV controller searches the device which is connected earlier during power on. If two devices have been connected at the time of power on, the AV controller will
search the device on the front panel.
Version
The current version of the firmware is displayed. The version is made up of the versions of the AV controller
and Onkyo dock (if connected).
Receiver
via NET: You can update the firmware via Internet. Check the network connection
before update.
via USB: You can update the firmware from a USB mass storage device.
You can update the AV controller’s firmware. Do not shutdown the power of the AV controller while update.
Universal Port
via NET: You can update the firmware via Internet. Check the network connection
before update.
via USB: You can update the firmware from a USB mass storage device.
You can update the Onkyo dock’s firmware. Do not shutdown the power of the AV controller while update.
Note:
This update shall not be performed when no dock is connected to UNIVERSAL PORT jack.
117
Advanced Setup—Continued
Lock Setup
Digital Input Signal Formats
With this preference, you can protect your settings by
locking the setup menus.
1
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “9. Lock Setup”, and then press
[Enter].
The “Lock Setup” menu appears.
9. Lock Setup
Lock
Unlocked
3
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select:
When the setup menus are locked, you cannot
change any setting.
Locked:
Setup menus locked.
Unlocked:
Setup menus not locked.
4
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
118
The digital input signal formats are available only for the
input sources that you have assigned a digital input jack
(see page 49).
Normally, the AV controller detects the signal format
automatically. However, if you experience either of the
following issues when playing PCM or DTS material,
you can manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS:
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try setting the format to PCM.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing
a DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
1
Press the [Receiver] button, and then
press and hold [Audio] button for about 8
seconds.
2
While “Auto” is displayed (about 3 seconds), press the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select: PCM, DTS or Auto.
PCM:
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM
indicator will flash and noise may also be produced.
DTS:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS,
the DTS indicator will flash and there will be no
sound.
Auto (default):
The format is detected automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the corresponding analog
input is used instead.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Using the Audio Settings
You can change various audio settings by pressing the [Audio] button.
1
Press the [Receiver] button followed by
the [Audio] button.
The audio setting items appear on the display.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item.
3
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
change the setting.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other settings.
Receiver
qwer
Audio
Note:
When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”
(page 115), the [Audio] button is disabled.
Tone Control Settings
You can adjust the bass for the front, front wide, front high, center, surround, surround back and subwoofer speakers
and treble for the front, front wide, front high, center, surround and surround back speakers, except when the Direct
or THX listening mode is selected.
Bass
–10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps (default: 0 dB)
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output by the speakers.
Treble
–10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps (default: 0 dB)
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output by the speakers.
Notes:
• To bypass the bass and treble tone circuits, select the Direct or THX listening mode.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Tone], Down and Up[–]/[+] buttons
(see page 61).
Late Night Function
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear
quiet parts even when listening at low volume levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you don’t want
to disturb anyone.
Late Night
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, the options are:
Off: Late Night function off (default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic range.
High: Large reduction in dynamic range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
Auto: The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off” automatically (default).
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Notes:
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV controller is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
it will be set to “Auto”.
119
Advanced Setup—Continued
Re-EQ Function
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh, making it
more suitable for home theater viewing.
Re-EQ
Off: Re-EQ Function off (default).
On: Re-EQ Function on.
This function can be used with the following listening modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS Express,
DSD, Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, Dolby PLIIx Movie, Neo:6 Cinema, 5.1-channel source + Neo:6,
and Neural Surround.
Re-EQ(THX)
Off: Re-EQ (THX) Function off.
On: Re-EQ (THX) Function on (default).
This function can be used with the following listening modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and
THX Ultra2 Cinema. When the AV controller is turned off, this setting is set to “On”.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™
Dynamic Volume See “Dynamic Volume” of “Audio Adjust” on page 104.
Note:
If you would like to use Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ in THX listening modes, set “Loudness Plus” setting to
“Off” and set “Preserve THX Settings ” setting to “No”.
Dolby Volume
Dolby Volume
Off:
Low:
Mid:
High:
Dolby Volume off (default).
Low Compression Mode becomes active.
Medium Compression Mode becomes active.
High Compression Mode becomes active. This setting affects volume the
most, causing all sounds to be of equal loudness.
Notes:
• When the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to effective, Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ will be set to “Off” from “Audyssey” and “Equalizer” setting will be set to
“Off” or remain set to “Manual”.
• If you would like to use Dolby Volume in THX listening modes, set “Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set
“Preserve THX Settings ” setting to “No”.
Music Optimizer
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality of compressed music files. Use it with music files that use
“lossy” compression, such as MP3. The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
Music Optimizer
Off: Music Optimizer off (default).
On: Music Optimizer on.
Note:
The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital audio input signals with a sampling rate below
48 kHz and analog audio input signals. The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct listening mode is
selected.
120
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Levels
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening to an input source.
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV controller is set to Standby. To save the setting you made
here, go to “Level Calibration” on page 100 before setting the AV controller to Standby.
Subwoofer 1
–15.0 dB to +12.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)
Subwoofer 2
–15.0 dB to +12.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)
Center
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)
Notes:
• You cannot use this function while the AV controller is muted.
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” cannot be adjusted (see page 98).
• This function will not work when the Direct listening mode is selected to play analog audio.
Audio Selector
You can set priorities of audio output when there are both digital and analog inputs.
Audio Selector
Auto: The AV controller gives priority to analog signals when there is no digital input
(default).
Multich: The AV controller always outputs analog signals from multichannel analog
input.
Balance: The AV controller always outputs analog signals from balanced input.
Analog: The AV controller always outputs analog signals.
Note:
This setting can be made only for the input source that is assigned as HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, OPTICAL IN,
multichannel input, or balanced input. If both HDMI (HDMI IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN or
OPTICAL IN) are assigned, HDMI input will be selected as a priority by setting to “Auto”. To select the digital
audio input, see “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 49.
A/V Sync
See “A/V Sync” of “Source Setup” on page 106.
121
NET/USB
About NET
The AV controller is network-ready, which means you
can hook it up to your home network with a standard
Ethernet cable and enjoy the music files stored on your
computer or media server. If your network is connected
to the Internet, you can also enjoy Internet radio.
Network Requirements
■ Ethernet Network
The AV controller’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T.
For best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is recommended. Although it’s possible to play
music on a computer that’s connected to the network
wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so wired connections are recommended.
■ Ethernet Router
A router manages the network, routing data and supplying IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows several networked computers to access the Internet simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The AV
controller needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices,
allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recommended.
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is
configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
for the AV controller (see page 128).
Connecting the AV Controller
To connect the AV controller to your home network, plug
one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV
controller’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end
into a LAN port on your router or switch.
The following diagram shows how you can connect the
AV controller to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
Internet radio
Modem
WAN port
Router
LAN port
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV controller to your home network.
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
Notes:
• To receive Internet radio with the AV controller, your
broadband Internet connection must be working and
able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have
any problems with your Internet connection.
• The AV controller uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see page 128.
• The AV controller does not support PPPoE settings, so
if you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you
must use a PPPoE-compatible router.
122
LAN port
LAN/Ethernet port
Computer or media server
NET/USB—Continued
Listening to Internet Radio
To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV controller to a network with Internet access (page 122).
You can select Internet radio stations by connecting to
the AV controller from your computer and selecting stations in your Web browser. Preset up to 40 Internet radio
stations.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by
the Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to
some stations.
The NETWORK indicator lights up.
When the program setting is finished,
go to step 3.
Notes:
• When it flashes, confirm the network
connection.
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See the separate
instructions for more information.
2
On your computer, start your
Web browser and enter the AV
controller’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL)
field.
The browser connects to the AV controller and displays the same screen as
the AV controller.
Select the Internet radio station
with your browser.
Notes:
• The AV controller’s IP address is
shown on the “Network” screen (see
page 128).
• If you’re using DHCP, your router
may not always allocate the same IP
address to the AV controller, so if
you find that you can’t connect to the
AV controller, recheck the AV controller’s IP address on “Network”
screen.
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a program, and
then press [Enter].
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
■ vTuner Internet Radio
• This unit includes the full vTuner Internet Radio Service at no additional charge. Once you have connected
your unit to the Internet you can select vTuner Internet
Radio to search for and play Internet radio stations and
podcasts at any time. To enhance your Internet radio
experience, the http://onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal is
available to you as an easy way to browse to find stations, set up/organize your favorites, add your own
stations, get help, etc. After the first time you try Internet radio/vTuner on your unit you can use the MAC
Address of your unit to create a member login account
(email address and password) on the
http://onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal. To verify your MAC
Address, please see Network Settings (page 128).
NET/USB
All Stations
qwer
Enter
--1. fm indie 104
The internet’s best source for i
0:00:00
WMA 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
1
Press the [NET/USB] button
repeatedly to select the Internet
Radio screen.
Internet Radio
1. vTuner Internet Radio
2. Pandora Internet Radio
3. Rhapsody
4. SIRIUS Internet Radio
5. --6. --7. --8. --9. --10. ---
Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it
on the Internet Radio screen, and then press [Enter] to
start playback.
Note:
If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem or ISDN), depending on the station, Internet
radio may not work satisfactorily. For best results, use a
broadband connection (e.g., cable modem, xDSL
modem, etc).
123
NET/USB—Continued
Playing Music Files on a Server
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
A list of music files appears.
This section explains how to play music files on a computer or media server through the AV controller. See
pages 126 to 127 for details on supported music servers
and music file formats.
For Windows Media Player 11, see “Windows Media
Player 11 Setup” on page 125.
1
Start your computer or media
server.
2
Press the [NET/USB] button to
select the Server screen.
All Music
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
My favorite song 1
My favorite song 2
My favorite song 3
My favorite song 4
My favorite song 5
My favorite song 6
My favorite song 7
1 / 10
5
Server
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a music file, and
press the [Enter] or Play [1]
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
Server1
Server2
Server3
Server4
Server5
Server6
Server7
Server8
Server9
Server10
My favorite song 1
1 / 10
The NETWORK indicator lights up.
Notes:
• When it flashes, confirm the network
connection.
• To update the screen, press the
[Return] button.
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a server, and
then press [Enter].
A list of items on the server appears.
Server1
Search
Recently Added
Artists
Album
Songs
Genre
Year
Rating
1/8
Search
You can search for music by Artist,
Album, or Track.
Notes:
• The search function does not work
with media servers which do not support this function.
• Depending on the sharing settings in
the media server, the AV controller
may not able to access the content.
Refer to the instruction manual of the
media server.
124
4 / 10
My favorite song 1
Artist name
My favorite album
0:00:00
MP3 0kbps 0kHz
or
ALL
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop playback, press the Stop [2]
button.
To select the next song, press the Next
[6] button. To select the beginning
of the current song, press the Previous
[7] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [7] button
twice.
To pause playback, press the [3] button. To fast forward the current song,
press the [4] button. To fast reverse
the current song, press the [5] button.
Note:
For some sort of media server, Fast Forward/Fast Reverse/Pause operations do
not work.
NET/USB—Continued
Random Playback
The Random function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs in random order, during playback (or
while playback is paused or stopped), press the [Random] button. All of the songs in the current folder will be
played in random order. When all of the songs in the
folder have been played once, they’ll all be played again
in a different random order. To cancel random playback,
press the [Random] button again.
Random playback supports up to 20,000 songs per
folder. If a folder contains more than this, songs over
20,000 are not included in random playback.
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [Repeat] button
repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat Folder, Repeat All,
or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat Folder mode, all of the songs in the current
folder are played repeatedly.
In Repeat All mode, all of the songs on the current server
are played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [Repeat] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Note:
If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this case,
check your server, network, and AV controller connections.
Windows Media Player 11 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 11 so that the AV controller can play the music
files stored on your computer.
1
Start Windows Media Player 11.
2
On the Library menu, select Media
Sharing.
The Media Sharing dialog box appears.
3
Select the Share my media check box,
and then click OK.
4
Select the AV controller in the list, and
then click Allow.
5
Click OK to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV
controller (see page 124).
Note:
Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft Web site.
125
NET/USB—Continued
Supported Audio File Formats
For server playback, the AV controller supports the following music file formats: MP3, WMA, WAV, FLAC,
Ogg Vorbis, AAC and LPCM.
■ MP3
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
format with a sampling rate of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and a bit-rate of between 8 kbps and
320 kbps. Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported.
(Playing times may not display correctly.)
• MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename
extension.
■ WMA
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using
Windows Media® Player.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps,
and WMA DRM are supported. Incompatible files
cannot be played.
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
may display incorrectly with VBR.)
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.
■ WMA Lossless
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz and bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps
are supported. Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing
times may display incorrectly with VBR.)
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.
■ WAV
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
• Number of channels: 2
• WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename
extension.
126
■ AAC
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of
between 8 and 320 kbps, are supported. Incompatible
files cannot be played.
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing
times may not display correctly.)
AAC files must have a “.aac”, “.m4a”, “.mp4”, “.3gp”,
“.3g2”, “.AAC”, “.M4A”, “.MP4”, “.3GP” or “.3G2”
filename extension.
■ FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing
times may display incorrectly with VBR.)
• FLAC files must have a “.flac” or “.FLAC” filename
extension.
■ Ogg Vorbis
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps
are supported. Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing
times may display incorrectly with VBR.)
• Ogg Vorbis files must have a “.ogg” or “.OGG” filename extension.
■ LPCM (Linear PCM)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
• Number of channels: 2
NET/USB—Continued
Server Requirements
The AV controller can play digital music files stored on
a computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
• DLNA-certified media server
If the operating system of your computer is Windows
Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is already installed.
Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be
downloaded for free from the Microsoft Web site.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV controller.
• Each folder may contain up to 20,000 music files, and
folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
Note:
For some sort of media server, the AV controller may not
able to recognize it, or may not able to play stored music
files.
Minimum system requirements for Windows
Media Player 11 for Windows XP
Operating system
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Professional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2),
Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005 (KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup
for Windows XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)
Processor:
233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
Memory:
64 MB
Hard disk:
200 MB of free space
Drive:
CD or DVD drive
Modem:
28.8 kbps
Sound card:
16-bit sound card
Monitor:
Super VGA (800 × 600)
Video card:
64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
Software:
Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
using a Windows Mobile-based
Pocket PC or smartphone)
Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
Netscape 7.1
About DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA
develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable
networks where digital content such as photos, music,
and videos can be shared through consumer electronics,
personal computers, and mobile devices in and beyond
the home. The AV controller certificate the DLNA
Interoperability Guidelines version 1.5.
127
NET/USB—Continued
Network Settings
3
Note:
When modifying network settings, after modifying it is
necessary to execute “Save”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “5. Network”,
and then press [Enter].
The “Network” screen appears.
7-5. Network
This section explains how to configure the AV controller’s network settings manually.
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need
to change any of these settings, as the AV controller is set
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these settings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet
networking is essential.
MAC Address
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server
Proxy URL
Proxy Port
http://www.proxy.xxx.com
8080
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select the setting, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to set them.
To enter an IP address, select the setting, and then press [Enter]. The arrow
[q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons can then be
used to enter numbers. Press [Enter]
again to set the number.
The settings are explained below.
5
When you’ve finished, press the
[Return] button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
What’s DHCP?
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV controller, and other
devices to automatically configure themselves on a network.
What’s DNS?
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses
DNS to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.
xx : xx : xx − yy : yy : yy
Enable
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
7-5. Network
1
2
Press the [Receiver] button,
followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Save
Cancel
6
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “Save”, and
then press [Enter].
When modifying network settings,
after modifying it is necessary to execute “Save”.
7
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
128
NET/USB—Continued
Mac Address
This is the AV controller’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.
DHCP
This setting determines whether or not the AV controller
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
Enable: DHCP enabled.
Disable: DHCP disabled.
If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS
Server” settings yourself.
Note:
When set to “Enable”, power consumption on standby
mode slightly increases.
■ Port Number
This is the network port used for control over the network.
Note:
Set the port number between from “49152” to “65535”.
About USB
USB can be used to play music files stored on USB mass
storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players), which can be plugged into the AV controller’s USB
port.
IP Address
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided
by your ISP.
The IP address must be within the following ranges.
Class A: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
Class B: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
Class C: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
Subnet Mask
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a subnet mask address.
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically: 255.255.255.0).
Gateway
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a gateway address.
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
Supported Audio File Formats
For USB mass storage device playback, the AV controller supports music file formats.
See “Supported Audio File Formats” on page 126.
USB Mass Storage Device Requirements
• The AV controller supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class.
• Playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
• USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file
system are supported.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each section
will be treated as an independent device.
• Each folder may contain up to 20,000 music files and
folders, and folders may be nested up to 16 levels
deep.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.
DNS Server
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.
Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.
Control
This setting enables or disables control over the network.
Enable: Control over the network enabled.
Disable: Control over the network disabled.
129
NET/USB—Continued
Playing Music Files on a USB Device
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a USB mass
storage device, and then press
[Enter].
A list of the device’s contents appears.
This section explains how to play music files on a USB
mass storage device.
USB Storage
Folder1
Folder2
01_Song_Track1
02_Song_Track2
03_Song_Track3
04_Song_Track4
05_Song_Track5
06_Song_Track6
07_Song_Track7
08_Song_Track8
NET/USB
Receiver
2/5
qwer
Enter
To open a folder, use the Up and Down
[q]/[w] buttons to select it, and then
press [Enter].
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a music file, and
press the [Enter] or Play [1]
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
1
1
2
Plug your USB mass storage
device into the AV controller’s
USB port.
Press the [NET/USB] button
repeatedly to select the
USB(Front) or USB(Rear) screen.
Folder1
1/17
02_Song_Track2
Artist
Album
00:10
01:12:34
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
or
USB(Front)
USB Storage
1/1
The USB indicator lights up if the AV
controller is able to read the USB mass
storage device. The USB indicator
flashes if the AV controller cannot read
the USB mass storage device.
130
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [Return] button.
To stop or pause playback, press the
Stop [2] or Pause [3] button, respectively.
To select the next song, press the Next
[6] button. To select the beginning
of the current song, press the Previous
[7] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [7] button
twice.
To fast forward the current song, press
the [4] button. To fast reverse the
current song, press the [5] button.
NET/USB—Continued
Random Playback
The Random function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [Random] button. All of the songs in
the current folder will be played in random order. When
all of the songs in the folder have been played once,
they’ll all be played again in a different random order. To
cancel random playback, press the [Random] button
again.
Random playback supports up to 20,000 songs per
folder. If a folder contains more than this, songs over
20,000 are not included in random playback.
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [Repeat] button
repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat Folder, Repeat All,
or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat Folder mode, all of the songs in the current
folder are played repeatedly.
In Repeat All mode, all of the songs on the USB mass
storage device (in the same partition) are played repeatedly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [Repeat] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Notes:
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV controller’s USB port, we recommend that you use its AC
adapter to power it.
• Do not connect the AV controller’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer cannot be played through the AV controller in this way.
• The AV controller supports USB MP3 players that
support the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which
allows USB storage devices to be connected to computers without the need for special drivers or software.
Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB MP3
player’s instruction manual for details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot
be played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the
loss or damage to data stored on a USB mass storage
device when that device is used with the AV controller. We recommend that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed
with special music software, and the iPod containing
music files managed with iTunes are not supported.
• Operation with all USB mass storage devices including the ability to power them is not guaranteed.
• Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a
USB hub. The USB mass storage device must be connected directly to the AV controller’s USB port.
• If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data,
the AV controller make take a while to read it.
• USB memory devices with security functions cannot
be played.
131
Multi Zone
Multiroom Capability
You can use three speaker systems with this AV controller—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 9.2 channels)
in your main listening room, Zone 2: a stereo speaker system in a second room, Zone 3: a stereo speaker system in a
third room. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.
Main room: Enjoy up to 9.2-channel surround-sound playback (see page 17).
You can enjoy the various listening modes, such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (see pages 84 to 94).
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback (see page 133).
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 134).
* The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2/3.
* External power amplifier required.
Main Room
Front wide left and right speakers*
Front high left and right speakers*
Front speakers
Center speaker
Subwoofer
Surround back left and right
speakers
Surround left and right speakers
*
Zone 2 Room
Front high and front wide speakers produce
no sound at the same time.
Zone 3 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
Left and right
stereo speakers
Powered subwoofer
132
Powered subwoofer
Multi Zone—Continued
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And,
you can select a different source for each room.
Connecting Zone 2
Zone 2 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 2.
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 3.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio
input on your Zone 2 amp.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on
a powered subwoofer in Zone 2.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals
on your Zone 2 amp.
Zone 2 Video Outputs
The AV controller features a composite video output and
component video output for connection to a TV in Zone
2, so you can enjoy both audio and video in that zone.
Hookup
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
• Alternatively, use a component video cable to connect
the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2
OUT jacks to a component video input on your Zone
2 TV.
Main room
TV
Main room
AV controller
Multichannel power amp
AV controller
Zone 2
TV
Zone 2
Powered
subwoofer
Receiver/
integrated amp
Note:
With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be set
on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume
control, set the “Zone2 Out” setting to “Variable” so that
you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV controller
(page 135).
• If you use the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT,
you must set the “Zone2 Component Out” setting to
“Use” (page 135).
Notes:
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from components connected to composite video inputs.
• If you use the ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the “Zone2
Component Out” setting to “Use” (page 135). The
ZONE 2 OUT outputs video only from components
connected to component video inputs.
133
Multi Zone—Continued
Connecting Zone 3
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.
Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 2.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio
input on your Zone 3 amp.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV controller’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on
a powered subwoofer in Zone 3.
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals on your Zone 3 amp.
Main room
Multichannel power amp
AV controller
Zone 3
Powered
subwoofer
Receiver/
integrated amp
Note:
With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be set
on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume
control, set the “Zone3 Out” setting to “Variable” so that
you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV controller
(page 135).
134
Multi Zone—Continued
5
Setting the Multi Zone
1
2
Press the [Receiver] button
followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
3
Remote ID
Multi Zone
Tuner
HDMI
Network
Firmware Update
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “2. Multi Zone”,
and then press [Enter].
The “Multi Zone” menu appears.
7–2. Multi Zone
Zone2 Out
Zone2 Maximum Volume
Zone2 Power On Volume
Zone2 Component Out
Zone3 Out
Zone3 Maximum Volume
Zone3 Power On Volume
4
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV controller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]
button.
■ Zone2/3 Out
If you’ve connected your Zone 2/3 speakers to an amp
with no volume control, set the “Zone2 Out” and “Zone3
Out” setting, respectively, to “Variable” so that you can
set the volume, balance, and tone of zone 2/3 on the AV
controller.
Fixed: The Zone 2/3 volume must be set on the
amp in that zone (default).
Variable: The Zone 2/3 volume can be set on the AV
controller.
7. Hardware Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Fixed
Off
Last
Use
Fixed
Off
Last
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.
■ Zone2/3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2/3. When the “Volume Display” setting is set to
“Absolute”, the “Maximum Volume” range is 50 to 99.
When it’s set to “Relative”, the range is –32 dB to
+17 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.
■ Zone2/3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2/3 each time the AV controller is turned on.
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Absolute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to 99, or “Max”.
When it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –Q dB,
–81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller
was last turned off, select “Last”.
The “Zone2/3 Power On Volume” cannot be set higher
than the “Zone2/3 Maximum Volume” setting.
■ Zone2 Component Out
If you’ve connected the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE
2 OUT to a TV in Zone 2, this setting is set to “Use”.
Use: Select if a TV in Zone 2 is connected the
COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT.
Not Use: Select if no TV in Zone 2 is connected the
COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT.
Note:
If the “Zone2 Component Out” setting is set to “Not
Use”, the same video signal as COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT is output from ZONE2 OUT (component).
135
Multi Zone—Continued
Using Zone 2/3
Controlling Zone 2/3 with the Remote
Controller
This section explains how to turn Zone 2/3 on and off,
how to select an input source for Zone 2/3, and how to
adjust the volume for Zone 2/3.
Standby
On
Zone
Controlling Zone 2/3 from the AV controller
Input
Selector
Zone 3 indicator
Zone 2 indicator
Note:
To control Zone 2/3, you must press the remote controller’s [Zone] button first.
The Zone button turns red while Zone 2 is on, and green
while Zone 3 is on.
Zone 3, Off
Zone 2, Off
1
Input selector buttons
1
Press the [Zone] button
repeatedly, then point the remote
controller at the AV controller
and press the [On] button.
Tip:
The 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high
(+12 V).
2
To select an input source for
Zone 2/3, press the [Zone] button
repeatedly, followed by an Input
Selector button.
To select AM or FM press the [Tuner]
Input Selector and the [Zone] button
repeatedly. You can also select SIRIUS
(North American models).
3
To turn off Zone 2/3, press the
[Zone] button repeatedly,
followed by the [Standby] button.
To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an
input source, press the [Zone 2]
or [Zone 3] button followed by an
input selector button within 8
seconds.
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Zone 2/3 indicator lights up.
Tip:
The 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high
(+12 V).
To select AM or FM press the [Tuner]
input selector and the [Zone 2] or
[Zone 3] button repeatedly. You can
also select SIRIUS (North American
models).
To select the same source as that of the
main room, press the [Zone 2] or
[Zone 3] button twice. “Zone 2 Selector: Source” or “Zone 3 Selector:
Source” appears on the display.
2
To turn off Zone 2/3, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes.
Press the [Off] button.
The zone is turned off, and the Zone 2
or Zone 3 indicator goes off.
Note:
When Zone 2/3 is turned off, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT goes low (0 volts).
136
Multi Zone—Continued
Notes:
• Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2
PRE OUT and ZONE 3 PRE OUT. Digital input
sources are not output. If no sound is heard when an
input source is selected, check if it’s connected to an
analog input.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM
radio station will be heard in each room. For example,
if you have an FM station for the main room, that station will also be used in Zone 2.
• When the input selector of Zone 2/3 is selected, power
consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, u functions will not work.
Muting Zones
Adjusting the Volume for Zones
Adjusting the Tone and Balance of Zones
Remote
controller
AV controller
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone] button repeatedly, and
then use the VOL [q]/[w] button.
On the AV controller, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button, and
then press the Zone Level Down
and Up [w]/[q] buttons.
Remote
controller
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone] button repeatedly, and
then press the [Muting] button.
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [Zone]
button, and then press the
[Muting] button again.
1
AV controller
On the AV controller, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
2
Press the AV controller’s [Tone]
button repeatedly to select
“Bass”, “Treble” or “Balance”.
3
Use the Down and Up [–]/[+]
buttons to adjust the bass, treble
or balance.
• You can boost or cut the bass or treble from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB
steps.
• You can adjust the balance from 0 in
the center to +10 dB to the right or
+10 dB to the left in 2 dB steps.
Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The volume, tone and balance functions cannot be set
when the “Zone2 Out” or “Zone3 Out” setting is set to
“Fixed” (page 135).
• Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller’s
[Zone] button to select zones, the last zone selection
will be retained once you have switched to other components by pressing other Remote Mode buttons after
pressing the [Zone] button.
137
Multi Zone—Continued
Using the 12V Triggers
3
The 12V triggers A, B, and C can be used to turn on 12V
trigger-capable components automatically when they are
selected as the input source. The triggers can be set so
that they activate when a connected component is
selected as the input source for the main room, Zone 2,
Zone 3, or any combination of rooms.
When triggered, the output from a 12V TRIGGER OUT
goes high (+12 volts and 150 milliamperes max. at
TRIGGER OUT A; +12 volts and 25 milliamperes max.
at TRIGGER OUT B and C).
Hookup
• Use a miniplug cable to connect the AV controller’s
12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, or C jack to the 12 V trigger input on a connected component.
When several components are turned on simultaneously
by using triggers A, B, and C, depending on the type of
components, a large amount of current may be drawn
momentarily. To prevent this, you can delay trigger signals A, B, and C individually. Another application for
trigger delay is eliminating the “thump” noise that’s
sometimes heard when a source component is turned on.
Delaying the trigger signal for your power amplifier so
that it’s the last component to be turned on will accomplish this.
1
Remote
controller
2
138
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “12V Trigger A,
B, or C,” and then press [Enter].
The “12V Trigger A/B/C Setup” screen
appears.
6–3. 12V Trigger A Setup
Delay
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
AUX 1
0sec
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “Delay,” and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
0 sec (Trigger A: default),
1 sec (Trigger B: default),
2 sec (Trigger C: default),
or 3 sec.
When 0 sec is selected, the trigger signal is output as soon as the input source
is changed.
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select an input source,
and use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select an option.
Off:
No trigger signal is output.
A 12-volt trigger signal is output when
the connected component is selected as
the source for:
Main (Trigger A: default):
Main room.
Zone2 (Trigger C: default):
Zone 2.
Main/Z2:
Main room or Zone 2.
Zone3:
Zone 3.
Main/Z3:
Main room or Zone 3.
Z2/Z3:
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Main/Z2/Z3 (Trigger B: default):
Main room, Zone 2, or Zone 3.
6
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [Enter].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
Multi Zone—Continued
Using the Remote Controller in Zone
2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
To control the AV controller with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commercially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV controller’s remote sensor, such as
when it’s installed inside a cabinet.
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV controller located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
IR receiver
Connecting
block
IR IN
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV controller in the main room via
the connecting block.
Inside
cabinet
Remote controller
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
IR IN
IR receiver
Connecting
block
Remote controller
Main room
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV controller’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack are fed
through to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked up by the AV controller’s remote control sensor are not output.
Zone 2/3
Signal flow
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack, as
shown below. The IR IN A and B jacks are identical. Up
to two IR receivers can be connected.
IR receiver
Connecting
block
IR IN
AV controller
IR OUT
IR Emitter
Remote controller
From the connecting block
Other component
Miniplug cable
Signal flow
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV controller’s IR OUT jack, as shown below.
Miniplug cable
AV controller
Other component
Signal flow
Remote control
sensor
Emitter
Miniplug
IR Emitter
AV controller
Signal flow
139
Controlling Other Components
You can use the AV controller’s remote controller
(RC-746M) to control your other AV components,
including those made by other manufacturers. This section explains how to enter the remote control code for a
component that you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR,
etc.
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 153).
• Program the Activities buttons to perform a sequence
of up to 32 remote control actions (see page 154).
Looking up for Remote Control Code
You can look up for appropriate remote control code
from onscreen setup menu.
Note:
This setting can be carried out by using Onscreen Setup
Menu only.
1
Press the [Receiver] button followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “8. Remote Controller Setup”, and then press
[Enter].
Preprogrammed Remote Control
Codes
The following Remote Mode buttons are preprogrammed with remote control codes for controlling the
components listed. You do not need to enter a remote
control code to control these components.
For details on controlling these components, see the
pages indicated.
Integra/Onkyo DVD player (page 145)
Integra/Onkyo CD player (page 148)
8. Remote Controller Setup
Onkyo cassette recorder with u (page 150)
Receiver
1. Remote Mode Setup
2. Activities Setup
3
qwer
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “1. Remote Mode
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
Enter
TV
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
AUX 1
Setup
AUX 2
TV/TAPE
CD
PHONO
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select remote mode, and
then press [Enter].
The category selection menu appears.
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
TV
TV/DVD
TV/VCR
140
TV
Controlling Other Components—Continued
5
To use the remote controller, point it at
the AV controller’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select category, and then
press [Enter].
The brand name input panel appears.
Transmitter
AV controller
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
TV
Category
Brand
Incoming sensor
TV
15
15
A
N
1
6
B
O
2
C
P
3
D
E
Q R
4
5
Space
F
S
6
G
T
7
H
U
8
I
J
V W
9
0
Back Space
K
X
–
L M
Y
Z
& @
Search
Approx.
15° off center
16ft. (5 m)
(Left/Right/Up/Down)
On the remote controller press the
[Enter] button.
Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select a character, and
then press [Enter].
Repeat this step from the 1st character
to the 3rd character of the brand name.
When you have entered the 3rd character, select “Search” and press [Enter].
After searching, a list of the brand
name appears.
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
Category
Brand
TV
XXXXX
Wait
When the transfer is successful, the following screen appears. Try it.
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
Category
Brand
TV
Category
Brand
TV
TV
TV
XXXXX
TV
SON
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sonawa
Sonber
Songba
Sonic
Soniko
Push remote Mode [TV].
Push some key to see if the TV responds.
Push remote Mode [Receiver].
Choose “Works” or “Doesn’t work”.
Works
Doesn’t work (try next Code)
Not Listed
* When category other than TV have been
selected, the content is different.
If the brand name is not found:
Use the Right [r] button to select
“Not Listed”, and then press [Enter].
The brand name input panel appears.
7
8
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select brand, and then
press [Enter].
After searching is completed, a message for remote control code transfer
will appear.
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
If you cannot control component,
use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “Doesn’t work (try
next Code)” and press [Enter].
The next code is appear.
TV
Category
Brand
If you can control component,
press the [Receiver] button, use
the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons
to select “Works”, and then
press [Enter].
The “Remote Mode Setup” menu
appears.
TV
XXXXX
Now we are ready to transfer data to Remote
Please hold remote so that it is facing the receiver.
Use Enter button of your remote to activate “OK”.
Ready?
OK
9
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
141
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Entering Remote Control Codes
1
Look up the appropriate remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category
(e.g., DVD player, TV, etc.).
2
While holding down the Remote
Mode button to which you want
to enter a code, press and hold
down the [Display] button (about
3 seconds).
The Remote Mode button lights up.
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be
entered for the [Receiver] and [Zone]
buttons.
• Only TV remote control codes can be
entered for the [TV] button.
• Except for the [Receiver], [TV], and
[Zone] buttons, remote control codes
from any category can be entered for
the Remote Mode buttons. However,
these buttons also work as input
selector buttons (page 60), so choose
a Remote Mode button that corresponds with the input to which you
connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to
the CD input, choose the [CD] button
when entering its remote control
code.
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that you
want to control.
Display
Remote
Mode
(3 seconds)
Number
buttons
3
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit
remote control code.
The Remote Mode button flashes
twice.
If the remote control code is not entered
successfully, the Remote Mode button
will flash once slowly.
Note:
The remote control codes provided are correct at the time
of printing, but are subject to change.
142
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Remote Control Codes for Integra/
Onkyo Components Connected via
u
Integra/Onkyo components that are connected via u
are controlled by pointing the remote controller at the
AV controller, not the component. This allows you to
control components that are out of view, in a rack, for
example.
1
Make sure the Integra/Onkyo component
is connected with an u cable and an analog audio cable (RCA).
See page 40 for details.
2
Enter the appropriate remote control code
for the Remote Mode button.
• [DVD/BD] button
31612: Integra/Onkyo DVD player with u
• [CD] button
71327: Integra/Onkyo CD player with u
• [TV/Tape] button
42157: Onkyo cassette recorder with u
(default)
• [Port] button
82351: Onkyo Dock (default)
See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.
3
Resetting Remote Mode Buttons
You can reset a Remote Mode button to its default
remote control code.
1
(3 seconds)
2
Press the Remote Mode button, point the
remote controller at the AV controller, and
operate the component.
If you want to control an Integra/Onkyo component by
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you want
to control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not connected via u, use the following remote control codes:
• [DVD/BD] button
30627: Integra/Onkyo DVD player without u
(default)
• [CD] button
71817: Integra/Onkyo CD player without u (default)
• [TV] button
11807: TV with
(default)
If you want to control an Integra/Onkyo component by
pointing the remote controller directly at it, use the
following remote control codes:
32900: Integra/Onkyo BD player
32901: Integra/Onkyo HD DVD player
70868: Onkyo MD recorder
71323: Onkyo CD recorder
81993: Onkyo RI Dock with u
Note:
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo RI Dock to the
TV/TAPE, VCR/DVR, or GAME jacks, for u to work
properly, you must set the Input Display accordingly
(see page 53).
While holding down the Remote
Mode button that you want to
reset, press and hold down the
[Audio] button until the Remote
Mode button lights up (about 3
seconds).
Within 30 seconds, press the
Remote Mode button again.
The Remote Mode button flashes
twice, indicating that the button has
been reset.
Each of the Remote Mode buttons is
preprogrammed with a remote control
code. When a button is reset, its preprogrammed code is restored.
Note:
The learning command is also reset.
Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
1
While holding down the
[Receiver] button, press and hold
down the [Audio] button until the
Receiver button lights up (about
3 seconds).
(3 seconds)
2
Within 30 seconds, press the
[Receiver] button again.
The Receiver button flashes twice, indicating that the remote controller has
been reset.
143
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling a TV
By pressing the [TV] button that’s been programmed
with the remote control code for TV, you can control
your TV with the following buttons.
For details on entering a remote control code for a different component, see page 142.
The [TV] button is preprogrammed with the remote control code for controlling a TV that supports the
*1 (limited to some models). The TV must be
able to receive remote control commands via
and be connected to the AV controller via HDMI. If controlling your TV via
doesn’t work very well,
program your TV’s remote control code into the [TV]
button and use the TV remote mode to control your TV.
Press [TV] button first.
a
j
k
a
b
c
d
e
f
l
m
n
o
b TV VOL [q]/[w] button
Adjust the TV’s volume.
c TV [Input] button
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
d Guide button
Displays the program guide.
e Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
f Setup button
Displays a menu.
g [1], [3], [2], [5], [4], [7], [6]
buttons*
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, Fast forward, Previous, and Next.
These buttons works for combination devices.
h Search, Repeat, Random, and Play Mode
buttons
Function as colored buttons or A, B, C, D buttons.
i Number buttons
Enter numbers. 0 button enters 11 on some components. +10 button* works as “--/---” button or +10.
j Display button
Displays information.
k Muting button
Mutes the TV.
l CH +/– button
Select channels on the TV.
m PREV CH button
Selects the previous or last channel.
n Return button
Exits the TV’s setup menu.
o Audio button*
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
g
p CLR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers, or
enters 12.
h
i
p
*1 The
supported by the AV controller is the CEC
system control function of the HDMI standard.
144
a On, Standby, TV [9] buttons
Set the TV to On or Standby.
Notes:
• With some components, certain buttons may not work
as expected, and some may not work at all.
• Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by the
function.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling a DVD Player or DVD Recorder
By pressing the Remote Mode button that’s been programmed with the remote control code for your DVD
player (HD DVD, Blu-ray, or TV/DVD combination),
you can control your player with the following buttons.
The [DVD/BD] button is preprogrammed with the
remote control code for controlling an Integra/Onkyo
DVD player.
For details on entering a remote control code for a different component, see page 142.
The [DVD/BD] button is preprogrammed with the
remote control code for controlling a component that
*1
. The component must be able to
supports the
receive remote control commands via
and be
connected to the AV controller via HDMI. If controlling
your component via
doesn’t work very well,
program your component’s remote control code into the
[DVD/BD] button and use the DVD/BD remote mode to
control your component.
Press the appropriate Remote
Mode button first.
a
l
*2
m
n
b
c
d
e
f
g
o
p
q
r
h
i
j
s
t
k
u
*1 The
supported by the AV controller is the CEC system control function of the HDMI standard.
*2 When you want to change the remote controller mode without
changing the current input source, press the [Mode] button and
within about eight seconds, press the Remote Mode button.
Then, with the AV controller’s remote controller, you can control the component corresponding to the button you pressed.
a On, Standby buttons
Sets the DVD player to On or Standby.
b TV [9] button
Set the TV to On or Standby.
c TV [Input] button
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
d TV VOL [q]/[w] button
Adjust the TV’s volume.
e Top Menu button
Displays a DVD’s top menu or a DVD’s title.
f Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
g Setup button
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
h [1], [3], [2], [5], [4], [7], [6]
buttons
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, Fast forward, Previous, and Next.
i Repeat button
Used with the repeat playback functions.
j Search button*
Used to search title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to search times for locating specific points.
k Number buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points. The [+10]
button* works as a +10 button or “--/---” button.
l Display button
Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.
m Muting button (62)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
n CH +/–, Disc +/– button
Selects discs on a DVD changer. Selects TV channels on a component with a built-in tuner.
o VOL [q]/[w] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller.
p Menu button
Displays a DVD’s menu.
q Return button
Exits the DVD player’s setup menu or returns to the
previous menu.
r Audio button*
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
s Random button*
Used with the random playback function.
145
Controlling Other Components—Continued
t Play Mode button*
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
u CLR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
Notes:
• With some components, certain buttons may not work
as expected, and some may not work at all.
• If you enter the remote control code for a HD DVD or
Blu-ray player that has A, B, C, and D or colored buttons, the [Search], [Repeat], [Random], and
[Play Mode] buttons will work as colored or A, B, C,
D buttons. In this case, these buttons cannot be used to
set repeat playback, random playback, or select play
modes.
• Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by the
function.
Controlling a VCR or PVR
By pressing the Remote Mode button that’s been programmed with the remote control code for your VCR
(TV/VCR, PVR, DBS/PVR combination or cable/PVR
combination), you can control your video recorder with
the following buttons.
For details on entering a remote control code for a different component, see page 142.
a On, Standby buttons
Set the video recorder to On or Standby.
b TV [9] button
Set the TV to On or Standby.
c TV [Input] button
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
d TV VOL [q]/[w] button
Adjust the TV’s volume.
Press the appropriate Remote
Mode button first.
e Guide button
Displays the program guide or navigation list.
a
j
f Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
g Setup button
Displays the video recorders setup menu.
*1
b
c
d
e
f
k
l
m
n
h Previous [7] button
Previous or instant replay function.
i Number buttons
Enter numbers. The [0] button enters 11 on some
components. The [+10] button works as a +10 button or “--/---” button.
j Display button
Displays information.
k Muting button (62)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
g
o
h
p
m VOL [q]/[w] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller.
q
n PREV CH button
Selects the previous channel.
l CH +/– button
Selects TV channels on the video recorder.
o Return button
Exits the menu or returns to the previous menu.
p Next [6] button
Next or advance function.
i
r
*1 When you want to change the remote controller mode without
changing the current input source, press the [Mode] button and
within about eight seconds, press the Remote Mode button.
Then, with the AV controller’s remote controller, you can control the component corresponding to the button you pressed.
146
q [1], [3], [2], [5], [4] buttons
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, and Fast forward.
r CLR button
Cancels functions or enters the number 12.
Note:
With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling a Satellite Receiver or Cable Receiver
By pressing the Remote Mode button that’s been programmed with the remote control code for your satellite
receiver, cable receiver, or DVD recorder (DBS/PVR
combination or cable/PVR combination), you can control your player with the following buttons.
For details on entering a remote control code for a different component, see page 142.
b Guide button
Displays the onscreen program guide.
c Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
d Setup button
Displays the setup menu.
Press the appropriate Remote
Mode button first.
a
a On, Standby buttons
Set the component to On or Standby.
e Search, Repeat, Random, and Play Mode
buttons
Function as colored buttons or A, B, C, D buttons.
g
f Number buttons
Enter numbers. The [+10] button works as a +10
button or “--/---” button.
g Display button
Displays information.
h
i
j
b
c
k
d
l
m
n
e
f
o
h Muting button (62)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
i CH +/– button
Selects satellite/cable channels.
j VOL [q]/[w] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller.
k PREV CH button
Selects the previous channel.
l Return button
Exits the menu.
m Audio button
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
n [1], [3], [2], [5], [4], [7], [6]
buttons
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, Fast forward, Previous, and Next.
o CLR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
Note:
With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
147
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling a CD Player, CD Recorder or MD Recorder
By pressing the Remote Mode button that’s been programmed with the remote control code for your CD
player, CD recorder, or MD recorder, you can control
your player with the following buttons.
The [CD] button is preprogrammed with the remote control code for controlling an Integra/Onkyo CD player.
For details on entering a remote control code for a different component, see page 142.
h
i
j
k
e Repeat button
Used with the repeat playback function.
f Search button
Used to locate specific points.
g Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points. The [+10] button works as a +10
button or “--/---” button.
h Display button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.
j Disc +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.
c
k VOL [q]/[w] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller.
l Random button
Used with the random playback function.
d
l
m
g
n
148
c Setup button
Used to access the Integra/Onkyo CD player’s settings.
i Muting button (62)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
b
e
f
b Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
d [1], [3], [2], [5], [4], [7], [6]
buttons
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, Fast forward, Previous, and Next.
Press the appropriate Remote
Mode button first.
a
a On, Standby buttons
Set the component to On or Standby.
m Play Mode button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
n CLR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
Note:
With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling an RI Dock
By pressing the Remote Mode button that’s been programmed with the remote control code for your Dock,
you can control your iPod in the Dock with the following
buttons.
For some RI docks, the [On], [Standby] button may not
work with a remote control code 82990 (without u).
In this case, make an u connection and enter a remote
control code 81993 (with u).
For details on entering a remote control code, see
page 142.
When Using an RI Dock:
• When using the Onkyo DS-A3 RI Dock, make an u
connection and enter a remote control code 81993
(with u).
• Connect the RI Dock to the TV/TAPE IN, VCR/DVR
IN, or GAME IN L/R jacks.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/
DOCK.
• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to DOCK (see
page 53).
• See to the Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Press the appropriate Remote
Mode button first.
a
a On, Standby buttons
Turns the iPod on or off.
Notes:
• This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or
DS-A2X RI Dock on or off.
• Your iPod may not respond the first time you press this
button, in which case you should press it again. This is
because the remote controller transmits the On and
Standby commands alternately, so if your iPod is
already on, it will remain on when the remote controller transmits an On command. Similarly, if your iPod
is already off, it will remain off when the remote controller transmits an Off command.
b Top Menu button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
c Arrow [q]/[w] and Enter buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
d Previous [7] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
e Fast Reverse [5] button
Press and hold to fast reverse.
f Pause [3] button
Pauses playback.
h
g Repeat button
Used with the repeat function.
h Display button
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
i Muting button (62)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
i
j
k
b
c
d
e
f
g
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
j Album +/– button
Selects the next or previous album.
k VOL [q]/[w] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller.
l Menu button
Exits the menu.
m Playlist [e]/[r] button
Selects the previous or next playlist on the iPod.
n Play [1] button
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically.
o Next [6] button
Selects the next song.
p Fast Forward [4] button
Press and hold to fast forward.
q Stop [2] button
Stops playback and displays a menu.
149
Controlling Other Components—Continued
r Play Mode button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
s Random button
Used with the shuffle function.
Note:
With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
Controlling a Cassette Recorder
By pressing the Remote Mode button that’s been programmed with the remote control code for your cassette
recorder, you can control your cassette recorder with the
following buttons.
The [TV/Tape] button is preprogrammed with the
remote control code for controlling an Onkyo cassette
recorder when used with an u connection.
For details on entering a remote control code for a different component, see page 142.
Press the appropriate Remote
Mode button first.
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
a On, Standby buttons
Turns the cassette recorder on or off.
b Previous and Next [7]/[6] buttons
The Previous [7] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
the current track. The Next [6] button selects the
next track.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [7]/[6] buttons may not work properly with some cassette tapes.
c Fast Reverse and Fast Forward [5]/[4]
buttons
The Fast Reverse [5] button starts fast reverse.
The Fast Forward [4] button starts fast forward.
a
d Reverse Play [t] button
Starts reverse playback.
e Play [1] button
Starts playback.
f
f Muting button (62)
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.
g
g VOL [q]/[w] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller.
h Stop [2] button
Stops playback.
Notes:
• An Onkyo cassette recorder connected via u can
also be controlled in Receiver mode.
• With some components, certain buttons may not work
as expected, and some may not work at all.
150
b
b
c
d
e
c
h
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Activities Setup
Via onscreen menu, you can specify what actions will be
taken by the Easy macro command in the Easy macro
mode.
1
2
Press the [Receiver] button followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “8. Remote Controller Setup”, and then press
[Enter].
The “Remote Controller Setup” menu
appears.
8. Remote Controller Setup
1. Remote Mode Setup
2. Activities Setup
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “2. Activities
Setup”, and then press [Enter].
The “Activities Setup” menu appears.
8–2. Activities Setup
My Movie
My TV
My Music
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select “My Movie”, “My
TV”, or “My Music”, and then
press [Enter].
My Movie: Actions for the
My Movie button is
changed.
My TV: Actions for the My TV
button is changed.
My Music: Actions for the
My Music button is
changed.
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select an item, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to change the settings.
The items are explained below.
8–2. Activities Setup
MY Movie
Source
TV Power ON
Source Power ON
Receiver Power ON
Receiver Source Change
Source Play
DVD/BD
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Source
DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
Game, AUX 1, AUX 2, TV/Tape,
Tuner, CD, Phono, Port, Net/USB
With this setting, you can choose
the input source.
TV Power On
Enable: TV to turn on “Enable”.
Disable: TV to turn on “Disable”.
This option enables the TV to turn
on when the Activities button is
pressed.
Source Power On
Enable: Source to turn on
“Enable”.
Disable: Source to turn on
“Disable”.
This option enables the Source to
turn on when the Activities button
is pressed.
Receiver Power On
Enable: AV controller to turn on
“Enable”.
Disable: AV controller to turn on
“Disable”.
This option enables the AV controller to turn on when the Activities
button is pressed.
Receiver Source Change
Enable: AV controller input
selector is change.
Disable: AV controller input
selector is not change.
This option enables the AV controller input selector to change when
the Activities button is pressed.
Source Play
Enable: Start playback the source
of “Enable”.
Disable: Start playback the source
of “Disable”.
This option enables the Source to
start playback when the Activities
button is pressed.
151
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Here are the default settings.
7
Default Settings
Items
My
Movie
My TV
My
Music
DVD
CBL
CD
TV Power On
Enable
Enable
Disable
Source Power On
Enable
Enable
Enable
Receiver Power On
Enable
Enable
Enable
Source
On the remote controller press
the [Enter] button.
8–2. Activities Setup
My Movie
Wait
Receiver Source
Change
Enable
Enable
Enable
Source Play
Enable
Disable
Enable
When the transfer is successful, the following screen appears.
8–2. Activities Setup
6
Press [Enter].
A message for transfer will appear.
8–2. Activities Setup
Successful
My Movie
Now we are ready to transfer data to Remote
Please hold remote so that it is facing the receiver.
Return
8
When you’ve finished, press the
[Enter] button.
The “8-2. Activities Setup” menu
appears onscreen.
9
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Use Enter button of your remote to activate “OK”.
Ready?
OK
To use the remote controller, point it at
the AV controller’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Transmitter
AV controller
Incoming sensor
15
15
Approx.
15° off center
16ft. (5 m)
(Left/Right/Up/Down)
152
My Movie
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Learning Commands
If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote Mode button flashes twice.
C
IS
D
DV
VID
-1
EO
IM
D
P
EE
SL
W
PO
ER
D
C
H
I-CT
ULTPU
M IN
RE
SUOD
M
D
D
C
ER
Supplied remote
controller
(RC-746M)
On
4
Remote
Mode
1
M
About 2 to 6
inches (5 to 15 cm)
O
N
R O
T
TO H
SE
C P
ER E
LE R
N PR
SE E
TU
T UN
PU T
IN
P
U
PE
O
R
TA
D
G
DV
-2
EO
VID
C
H
L
SE
STE
TEON
T
TIN
U
G
LU
VO
M
E
The AV controller’s remote controller can learn the commands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
example, the Play command from your CD player’s
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
[1] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
remote control code (page 142) but some buttons don’t
work as expected.
While holding down the Remote
Mode button for the mode in
which you want to use the command, press and hold down the
[On] button until the Remote
Mode button lights up (about 3
seconds).
(3 seconds)
2
On the supplied remote controller, press the button you want to
learn the new command.
3
Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches (5
to 15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose command you want to learn until the
Remote Mode button flashes.
To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any Remote Mode button when
you’ve finished. The Remote Mode
button flashes twice.
Notes:
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
Remote Mode, Activities [All Off], [My Movie], [My
TV], [My Music].
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for
controlling Integra/Onkyo CD players, cassette decks,
and DVD players. However, they can learn new commands, and you can restore the preprogrammed commands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(see page 143).
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
• Depending on the remote controller that you are using,
there may be some buttons that won’t work as
expected, or even some remotes that cannot be learned
at all.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
■ Deleting Learning Commands
1. While holding down the Remote Mode button for
the mode in which you want to delete the command,
press and hold down the TV [9] button until the
Remote Mode button lights up (about 3 seconds).
2. Press the Remote Mode button or the button from
which you want to delete the commands.
The Remote Mode button flashes twice.
When you press the Remote Mode button, all commands learned in that remote mode will be deleted.
153
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Using Normal Macros
3
You can program the remote controller’s Activities buttons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the following actions:
1. Press the [Receiver] button to select the Receiver
remote controller mode.
2. Press the [On] button to turn on the AV controller.
3. Press the [CD] button to select the CD input source.
4. Press the Play [1] button to start playback on the
CD player.
You can program Activities buttons so that all four
actions are performed with just one button press.
Note:
Once you have taught new macro commands, the original macro will no longer work. If you want to retrieve
them, you will have to teach again.
Running Macros
Press the [My Movie], [My TV], or
[My Music] button.
The commands in the macro are transmitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote controller pointed at the AV controller until all
of the commands have been transmitted.
Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the current remote controller
mode.
Making Macros
Each Activities button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to 32 commands.
All Off
My Movie,
My TV,
My Music
Receiver
Deleting Macros
1
1
When you’ve finished, press the
Activities button again.
The Activities button flashes twice.
If you enter 32 commands, the process
will finish automatically.
While holding down the
[Receiver] button, press and hold
down the [My Movie], [My TV], or
[My Music] button until the
My Movie, My TV, or My Music
button lights up (about 3 seconds).
While holding down the [Audio]
button, press and hold down the
[All Off] button until the All Off
button lights up (about 3 seconds).
(3 seconds)
(3 seconds)
2
154
2
Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example above, you’d press
the following buttons: [On], [CD], Play
[1].
Note:
The [Mode] button is invalid at macro
making operation.
Press the [All Off] button again.
The All Off button flashes twice.
Notes:
• All of the Activities buttons will
automatically switch to the Easy
macro mode when the macro is
deleted.
• When you using Normal macro
mode, you cannot use the easy macro
command including the change of
the source component.
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV controller, look for
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased
this unit.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV controller before contacting the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
To reset the AV controller to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [On/Standby] button. “Clear”
will appear on the display and the AV controller
will enter Standby mode.
Note that resetting the AV controller will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
Power
Can’t turn on the AV controller
• Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into
the wall outlet.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five
seconds or more, then plug it in again.
Audio
There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet
• Make sure that your multichannel power amplifier is
turned on and set up correctly and connected to the AV
controller properly (page 16).
• Make sure that the digital input source is selected
properly (page 49).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 23).
• Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components are connected properly (pages 25 to 39).
• Make sure that the input source is properly selected
(page 60).
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume. It can be set to −Q dB, −81.5 dB
through +18.0 dB (page 60). The AV controller is
designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide
volume range, allowing precise adjustment.
• If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display,
press the remote controller’s [Muting] button to
unmute the AV controller (page 62).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the Phones
jack, no sound is output by the speakers (page 62).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a supported audio format.
• Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some game consoles, such as those
that support DVD, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must connect an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.
• Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,
twisted, or damaged.
• Not all listening modes use all speakers (page 92).
• Specify the speaker distances (page 99) and adjust the
individual speaker levels (page 100).
• Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not
still connected.
• The input signal format is set to PCM or DTS. Set it to
Auto (page 118).
Only the front speakers produce sound
• When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,
only the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“Left / Right” (page 102).
• Check the “Speaker Configuration” (page 98).
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listening mode with a mono source, such as an AM radio
station or mono TV program, the sound is concentrated in the center speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“Center” (page 102).
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 98).
The surround speakers produce no sound
• When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or
Mono listening mode is selected, the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and current listening mode,
not much sound may be produced by the surround
speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 98).
The center speaker produces no sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“Left / Right” (page 102).
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 98).
155
Troubleshooting—Continued
The front high, front wide and surround back
speakers produce no sound
• Depending on the current listening mode, no sound
may be produced by the front high, front wide, and
surround back speakers. Select another listening mode
(page 92).
• Not much sound may be produced by the front high,
front wide, and surround back speakers with some
sources.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 98).
The subwoofer produces no sound
• When you play source material that contains no information in the LFE channel, the subwoofer may produce no sound.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 98).
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some game consoles, such as those
that support DVD, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.
• Depending on the input signal, some listening modes
cannot be selected (pages 85 to 91).
Can’t get 6.2/7.2 playback
• If no front high, front wide and surround back speakers are connected, or the Zone 2/3 speakers are being
used, 6.2/7.2 playback is not possible.
• You can not always select all of the listening modes,
depending on the number of the speakers connected
(pages 85 to 91).
The speaker volume cannot be set as required
(The volume cannot be set to +18.0 dB)
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 112).
• If the volume level of each individual speaker has been
adjusted to high positive values (page 100), then the
maximum master volume possible may be reduced.
Note that the individual speaker volume levels are set
automatically after Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room
Correction and Speaker Setup has been completed
(page 55).
Noise can be heard
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on may degrade the
audio performance, so don’t do it.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
The Late Night function doesn’t work
• Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD (page 119).
156
The analog multichannel input doesn’t work
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 31).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 50).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 83).
• Check the audio output settings on your source component.
About DTS signals
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream stops, the AV controller remains in DTS listening mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, because the AV controller
does not switch formats immediately, you may not
hear any sound, in which case you should stop your
player for about three seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to
playback DTS material properly even though your
player is connected to a digital input on the AV controller. This is usually because the DTS bitstream has
been processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate, or
frequency response changed) and the AV controller
doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such
cases, you may hear noise.
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio signals, audio output may not start immediately.
Troubleshooting—Continued
Video
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 23).
• Make sure that each video component is properly connected (pages 25 to 39).
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, set the
“Monitor Out” setting other than “Analog” (page 45),
and select “- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on
page 47 to watch composite video, S-Video, and component video sources.
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, S MONITOR OUT, or V MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to “Analog”
(page 45), and select “- - - - -” in the “Component
Video Input Setup” on page 48 to watch composite
video and S-Video sources.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, you must assign that input to an input selector
(page 48), and your TV must be connected to either
the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT (pages 25 and 29).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector
(page 47), and your TV must be connected to the
HDMI outputs (page 25).
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV controller is connected is selected.
• If you selected “Both (Main)” or “Both (Sub)” in the
“Monitor Out” setting, no picture may appear on your
TV that is connected to a secondary HDMI output (not
a priority HDMI output). In this case, change the setting to “Both” (page 45).
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
• Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is
not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC
are not guaranteed (page 25).
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”,
and the “Resolution” setting is set to anything other
than “Through” (page 45), no video is output by the
HDMI outputs.
• When the “Resolution” (page 46) is set to any resolution not supported by the TV, no video is output by the
HDMI outputs.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
controller’s display, this indicates that your TV does
not support the current video resolution and you need
to select another resolution on your DVD player.
The onscreen menus don’t appear
• If your TV is connected to the analog outputs, set the
“Monitor Out” setting to “Analog” (page 45).
• (Australian models) Specify the TV system used in
your area in the “TV Format Setup” on page 52.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV controller is connected is selected.
The picture is distorted
• (Australian models) Specify the TV system used in
your area in the “TV Format Setup” on page 52.
The immediate display does not appear
• If you select other than “Analog” in the “Monitor Out”
setting (page 45), the immediate display will not
appear when the input signal from the COMPONENT
VIDEO IN is output to a device connected to the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT.
• Depending on the input signal, the immediate display
may not appear when the input signal from the HDMI
input is output to a device connected to the HDMI output.
Tuner
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is
noisy, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
appear
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the AV controller away from your TV or computer.
• Listen to the station in mono (page 65).
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
Remote Controller
The remote controller doesn’t work
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct polarity (page 13).
• Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of batteries, or old and new batteries (page 13).
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV controller, and that there’s no
obstruction between the remote controller and the AV
controller’s remote control sensor (page 13).
• Make sure that the AV controller is not subjected to
direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.
Relocate if necessary.
• If the AV controller is installed in a rack or cabinet
with colored-glass doors, the remote controller may
not work reliably when the doors are closed.
157
Troubleshooting—Continued
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller mode (pages 14 and 144 to 150).
• When using the remote controller to control other
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may
not work as expected.
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 142).
• Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV controller
and remote controller (page 114).
Can’t control other components
• If it’s an Integra/Onkyo component, make sure that the
u cable and analog audio cable are connected properly. Connecting only an u cable won’t work
(page 40).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller mode (pages 14 and 144 to 150).
• If you’ve connected an u-capable Integra/Onkyo
MD recorder, CD recorder, RI Dock to the TV/TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME IN or
VCR/DVR IN jacks, for the remote controller to work
properly, you must set the display to MD, CDR, or
DOCK (page 53).
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
appropriate remote control code (page 142).
• To control another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at that component.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 153).
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s connected via u, point the remote controller at the AV
controller. Be sure to enter the appropriate remote
control code first (page 143).
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not
connected via u, or another manufacturer’s component, point the remote controller at the component. Be
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 142).
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the transmitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.
158
Dock for iPod
There’s no sound
• Make sure your iPod is actually playing.
• Make sure your iPod is inserted properly in the Dock.
• Make sure the UP-A1 Dock is connected to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack on the AV controller.
• Make sure the AV controller is turned on, the correct
input source is selected, and the volume is turned up.
• Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.
• Try resetting your iPod.
There’s no video
• Make sure that your iPod’s TV OUT setting is set to
On.
• Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or
the AV controller.
• Some versions of the iPod do not output video.
The AV controller’s remote controller doesn’t
control your iPod
• Make sure your iPod is properly inserted in the Dock.
If your iPod is in a case, it may not connect properly
to the Dock. Always remove your iPod from the case
before inserting it into the Dock.
• The iPod cannot be operated while it’s displaying the
Apple logo.
• Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.
• When you use the AV controller’s remote controller,
point it toward your amp.
• If you still can’t control your iPod, start playback by
pressing your iPod’s Play button. Remote operation
should then be possible.
• Try resetting your iPod.
• Depending on your iPod, some buttons may not work
as expected.
• You can’t control your iPod if the battery is extremely
low. Use the iPod after recharging for a while.
The AV controller unexpectedly selects your
iPod as the input source
• Always pause iPod playback before selecting a different input source. If playback is not paused, the Direct
Change function may select your iPod as the input
source by mistake during the transition between
tracks.
Recording
Can’t record
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV controller, input signals are not fed through to outputs with
the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or VCR/
DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
Troubleshooting—Continued
Zone 2/3
There’s no sound
• Only components connected to analog inputs can be
played in Zone 2/3.
Music Server and Internet Radio
Can’t access the server or Internet radio
• Check the network connection between the AV controller and your router or switch.
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
• Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV controller (page 127).
• Check the “Network Settings”(page 128).
Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
• Make sure your server is compatible with the AV controller (page 127).
• If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
• If the server is serving large music files to several networked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the network, upgrade your network, or use a switch instead
of a hub.
Can’t connect to the AV controller from a Web
browser
• If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always
allocate the same IP address to the AV controller, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV controller’s IP address
on Network screen.
• Check the “Network settings” (page 128).
Others
The sound changes when I connect my
headphones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono or Direct.
The speaker distance cannot be set as required
• In some cases, corrected values suitable for home theater use may be set automatically.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• Use the “Multiplex” setting on the “Audio Adjust”
menu to select “Main” or “Sub” (page 102).
The u functions don’t work
• To use u, you must make an u connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component and AV controller, even if they are connected digitally (page 40).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the u functions
don’t work.
The functions Auto Power On/Standby and
Direct Change don’t work for components
connected via u
• These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned
on.
When performing “Audyssey MultEQ® XT
Room Correction and Speaker Setup”, the
measurement fails showing the message
“Ambient noise is too high.”.
• This can be caused by any malfunction in your speaker
unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
USB Mass Storage Device Playback
Can’t access the music files on a USB device
• Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
• The AV controller supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class. However, playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
159
Troubleshooting—Continued
The following settings can be made for the SVideo or composite video inputs
You must use the buttons on the AV controller to make
these settings.
1. While holding down the input selector button for the
input source that you want to set, press the [Setup]
button.
2. Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to change
the setting.
3. Press the input selector button for the input source
that you want to set when you’ve finished.
• Video Attenuation
This setting can be made for the DVD/BD, VCR/
DVR, CBL/SAT, Game or AUX1 input.
If you have a games console connected to the
S-Video and composite video input, and the picture
isn’t very clear, you can attenuate the gain.
Video ATT:OFF: (default).
Video ATT:ON: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.
The AV controller contains a microcomputer for signal
processing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it
back in again.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
the unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded correctly.
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, set the AV controller to Standby.
Important Note Regarding Video Playback
The AV controller can upconvert component video, SVideo, and composite video sources for display on a TV
connected to the HDMI outputs. However, if the picture
quality of the source is poor, upconversion may make the
picture worse or disappear altogether.
In this case, try the following:
1 If the video source is connected to a component
video input, connect your TV to the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT.
If the video source is connected to an S-Video input,
connect your TV to a MONITOR OUT S.
If the video source is connected to a composite video
input, connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT V.
2 On the main menu, select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then select “2. HDMI Input”.
Select the relevant input selector, and assign it to
“- - - - -” (page 47).
3 On the main menu, select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then select “3. Component Video
Input” (page 48).
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN1, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN1”.
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN2, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN2”.
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN3, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN3”.
If the video source is connected to an S-Video input
or composite video input, select the relevant input
selector, and assign it to “- - - - -”.
If “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”, press [VCR/
DVR] and [Return] buttons on the AV controller at the
same time. Select “Skip” in the “VideoProcessor” setting
by pressing the [Return] button repeatedly on the display. To reset back to the original setting, press the same
button at the same time. If you select “Use”, the AV controller will output video signals from the video processor.
160
Specifications
Amplifier Section
Input Sensitivity and Impedance
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ, (PHONO MM)
Output Level and Impedance
200 mV/470 Ω (REC OUT)
Phono Overload
70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5 %)
Frequency Response
5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB - 3 dB
(Direct mode)
Tone Control
±10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
Video Section
General
Power Supply
North American:
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Australian:
AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
North American: 1.2 A
Australian: 110 W
Dimensions (W × H × D)
435 × 198.5 × 445 mm
Weight
Video Inputs
HDMI
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB, PR/CR)
0.28 Vp-p/75 Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)
Component Video Frequency Response
5 Hz - 100 MHz - 3 dB
Tuner Section
FM Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz
Australian:
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS
AM Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
530 kHz - 1710 kHz
Australian:
522 kHz - 1611 kHz
Preset Channel
40
Digital Tuner (North American models only):
SIRIUS
17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 17-1/2"
13.5 kg (29.8 lbs.)
Component
S-Video
Composite
IN1 (DVD/BD), IN2 (VCR/DVR),
IN3 (CBL/SAT), IN4 (GAME),
IN5 (AUX2), IN6, IN7, AUX1 (Front)
IN1 (DVD/BD), IN2 (CBL/SAT),
IN3 (GAME)
DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
GAME
DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
GAME, AUX1 (Front)
PC INPUT Analog RGB
1
■ Video Outputs
HDMI
Component
S-Video
Composite
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
MONITOR OUT, ZONE 2 OUT
MONITOR OUT,
VCR/DVR (REC OUT)
MONITOR OUT,
VCR/DVR (REC OUT), ZONE 2 OUT
■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs
Balance Inputs
Multichannel Inputs
Optical: 3 (Rear), 1 (Front)
Coaxial: 3 (Rear)
MULTI CH, DVD/BD, VCR/DVR,
CBL/SAT, GAME, AUX2, TV/TAPE,
CD, PHONO, AUX1 (Front)
2
7.1
■ Audio Outputs
Analog Outputs
TV/TAPE, VCR/DVR,
ZONE 2 PRE OUT, ZONE 3 PRE OUT
Balance Pre Outputs
FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR,
LH/LW, RH/RW, SW1, SW2
Multichannel Pre Outputs
9
Subwoofer Pre Outputs 2
Phones
1
■ Control Terminal
MIC
RS232
Ethernet
IR Input
IR Output
12 V Trigger Out
USB
Yes
1
1
2
1
3
2 (Front and Rear)
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
161
Video Resolution Chart
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV controller.
✔: Output
NTSC
Output
Input
HDMI
COMPONENT
1080p
1080i
720p
480p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
COMPOSITE 480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
1080p
1080i
HDMI
720p
480p
480i
1080p
1080i
COMPONENT 720p
480p
S-VIDEO
480i
S-VIDEO COMPOSITE
1080p
1080i
720p
480p
480i
480i
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*1
✔*1
✔
✔
✔*1
*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*1
✔*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*1
✔*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1: The output is limited to 480p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision.
PAL
Output
Input
HDMI
COMPONENT
1080p
1080i
720p
576p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
576i
✔
✔
✔
COMPOSITE 576i
✔
✔
✔
1080p
1080i
HDMI
720p
576p
576i
1080p
1080i
COMPONENT 720p
576p
S-VIDEO
576i
1080p
1080i
720p
576p
576i
576i
576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
✔*2
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
✔*2
✔
✔
✔
✔*2
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2: The output is limited to 576p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision.
162
S-VIDEO COMPOSITE
✔
MEMO
163
Integra Division of
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-818-9200 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.integrahometheater.com
Integra Division of
ONKYO CORPORATION
Sales & Product Planning Div.: 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163
En
Y0908-1
SN 29400076
(C) Copyright 2009 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
164
* 2 9 4 0 0 0 7 6 *
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising